新目标（Go for it）英语七年级上学期同步辅导练习（含同步练习资料包）[上学期]

百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
Starter Unit 1 Good Morning!
Hello, dear boys and girls! Nice to meet you here!
亲爱的同学们，欢迎来到初中的英语课堂。结束了快乐的小学生活，你们的人生在此又翻开了新的一页。你们长大了。与此同时，你们将要学习的知识，学习习惯和学习方法都要发生巨大的变化。尽快地适应中学英语课堂，尽快养成良好的学习习惯和方法，对于未来三年的初中学习，乃至你的高中、大学生活都有非常重要的意义。知识的大门正徐徐为你敞开，你准备好了吗？作为老师，我要提醒你做好如下准备：
1. 小学英语教学只强调听说能力，而初中开始则关注听、说、读、写四种能力的全面发展，尤其是阅读和写作部分则是初三中考的重点测试内容。因此扎实的单词功底是必须在初一就开始积累的。必须勤于背单词、背课文，善于掌握新词汇，新句子。只有过了单词关，才能谈及阅读能力和写作能力的提高。单词，要达到音、形、义的结合统一，即会读、会写、会用才行。
2. 重视阅读。新课程标准要求初中阶段要有15万字的课外阅读量。这需要我们每天要读100词左右的文章1－2篇。大量的阅读会丰富我们的知识面，增加词汇量，形成良好的语感、塑造强健的语言能力。多好啊！值得我们认真去做。
3. 要有恒心。学英语不是很轻松的事情，也没有捷径可寻。只要每天不断的读、背、记，日积月累，就会不断进步！No pain, No gain! 没有付出就没有收获。
4. 要掌握一定的学习方法。
A. 坚持四个环节
（1）预习：培养自主学习习惯，自学单词的能力，在老师上课前有所准备。
（2）听讲：要求认真、积极参与课堂活动，勇于表现；记好笔记。
（3）作业：无论笔头作业还是背诵、背单词的作业都要认真完成。
（4）复习：养成及时复习的好习惯，及时巩固所学的知识，包括每日复习、复周复习、每单元复习等。
B. 养成良好习惯。
英语能力的提高是与日复一日的努力分不开的。每天听录音15分钟，跟读对话课文；每天坚持做阅读、完型各一篇。这样的好习惯会让你的英语成绩突飞猛进的。
让我们以快乐的心态，走进初中英语学习吧！祝你成功。
接下来，我们进入初一英语预备篇，Starter, Unit 1
［学习过程］
一. 语言目标（Language Goals）
1. Letters A-H 字母（A-H）
2. How to greet people.
如何与人打招呼。
二. 语言结构（Language Structure）
1. 学会认读元音字母A、E在单词中的发音。
2. 掌握认读一些英文名字
三. 主要句型（Target Language）
1. Good morning! 早上好！
2. Good afternoon! 下午好！
3. Good evening! / Good night! 晚上好！/晚安！
4. How are you Fine, thanks. / I’m fine, thanks. 你好吗？我很好，谢谢。
5. I’m OK. 我还可以，还不错。
四. 重点难点分析（Key Points）
1. 关于英文字母的书写
书写英文字母是学习英语的第一关，正确、漂亮的书写是学习英语的第一步。在初中，同学们经常会写错、混淆一些字母及大小写的格式。下面的口诀可能对你有所帮助。请同学们认真研读，勤于练习。
大写字母好掌握，
全部都写上两格。
下端紧紧贴基线，
上方莫靠顶格写。
大小高低须一样，
右倾五度莫太斜。
（小写字母）
冲天辫，上两格，
小尾巴，下两格，
无辫无尾中间卧，
i，t上面各一半，
j，p下面两格多，
惟独f占三格。
2. How to greet people. 如何与人打招呼。
我们生活中最常用的话就是和人打招呼。如何用英语表达呢？对于不同年龄的人打招呼有区别吗？请看下面的几种方式。
（1）Hello! / Hi! 你好 如：Hello, Peter!
这是最简单，也是最常见的打招呼的方式之一。年轻人第一次见面，也常用到这种方式，表达出双方十分亲切，随意和友好。
（2）Good morning! 早上好！
Good afternoon! 下午好！
Good evening! 晚上好！
也很常见，也较为正式些！回答时，是原句的重复。
如：
－Good morning, Mr Smith!
－Good morning, Ms Johnson!
在这里，要注意Good evening! 与Good night!的区别
Good evening! 是晚上见面时打招呼的用语，
Good night! 是临睡前互道晚安。因此要说得轻柔些，否则会吓走好梦的。两者不能混用。
（3）How are you! I’m fine, thanks.
你好吗？我很好，谢谢。
在年龄稍长一些的人群中，这种问候的方式比较适合了。请注意这种方式不适合第一次见面。
（4）How do you do How do you do.
你好！ 你好！
第一次见面时，人们可以说这样的话互相致以问候。但现在的人们越来越少用了，尤其是美语中，更少见到。How do you do! 快成为美国英语中的经典古董了。
（5）What’s up / How’s everything going 怎么样？
Pretty good! / Not bad. / I’m OK. 相当好。/不错。/还行。
这些是时下美国青少年中，常用的打招呼方式，学会它们吧！
3. 英语单词的音、形、义。
英语单词和汉字一样都是由形、音、义三个部分组成的。如单词hi：
词形：h－i→hi（形状）音：|hai|（读音）义：你好。组成单词hi中的h、i叫字母，它们好像汉字的基本笔画，英语成千上万的单词由它们组合而成。因此要学会英语，尤其是书面语，我们必须要学好字母，会读、会写，还要掌握它们在单词中的发音。
4. 背单词的一个好办法－－形、音、义结合，才记得牢。
学英语免不了要记单词，要掌握一个单词，必须同时弄清三个部分：词形、该词的发音（或读法）和含义。词形是指单词由几个字母排列组合起来的，词音是指单词相应的音标元素的排列组合。词义即“什么意思”。形、音、义对每个单词而言是必不可少的。不了解词形就写不出来，看不懂，不能发音便不能使别人听懂，不清楚词义便不知如何使用。那么怎样才能快速地记单词呢？那就是形音义结合，找规律记单词，使你在遇到任何一个生词时，能够通过读音规则准确地读出来，快速记忆。什么是读音规则？就是字母与发音的对应关系。如：辅音字母b在单词中对应辅音音素|b|，|b|的发音与汉语拼音的bo（播）相似，英语中的发音字母有元音、辅音两种。辅音字母一般在单词中对应辅音音素，而且与汉语拼音声母形状一样的辅音的发音基本与汉语拼音中的声母相似。请大声朗读下列字母、音标|b|、|d|和单词，体会它们之间的形、音对应关系。
b→|b| book Ben bee
书 本 蜜蜂
d→|d| dad good bird
爸爸 好的 鸟
5. 元音字母a、e在重读开音节和闭音节中的读音。
（1）什么是开音节，什么是闭音节？
（2）什么是重读音节？
在英语中元音特别响亮（类似韵母），一个元音可以构成一个音节，例如I（我），a（一，一个），一个元音和一个或几个辅音结合也可以构成一个音节，如desk（课桌）。在英语中，双音节或多音节的词，每个词都有一个读得特别响亮的音节，叫做重音节，用重音符号“＇”来表示，其他不读得特别响亮的音节叫非重读音节。我们根据组成音节的字母的组合形式，将音节分为开音节和闭音节。
△元音字母在开音节中读本音（即名称音），在闭音节中发相应的短音。
元音字母a
在开音节中读名称音a|ei|face name Dale eraser David Amy 在闭音节中读作|| map bag apple cap An
元音字母e
e|i:|开音节evening Eve me wehe these e|e|闭音节desk pen BenEmma
6. 本单元出现了不少英文名字，你能根据读音规律分类识记吗？将下列英文名字按读音规律分类：学会认读这些名字：
Amy 艾米 Dale黛尔 Cara卡拉
Ben本 Eve伊夫 Carol卡罗尔
Ann安 Alan艾伦 Barry巴里
Beth贝思 Helen海伦 Frank弗兰克
Grace格雷斯 Dennis丹尼斯 Henry亨利
Peter彼得 Emma埃玛 Emily埃米莉
David戴维
a|ei|：____________________
a||：____________________
e|i:|：____________________
e|e|：____________________
Keys:
a|ei|：Amy Dale Grace David
a||：Carol Ann Barry Alan Frank Cara
e|i:|：Eve Peter
e|e|：Ben Beth Helen Dennis Henry Emma Emily
【模拟试题】（答题时间：50分钟）
一. 选择每组字母不含相同元音的一个或每组单词画线部分读音不同的一个
（ ）1. A. K B. T C. D D. V
（ ）2. A. N B. E C. L D. M
（ ）3. A. H B. I C. J D. K
（ ）4. A. B B. D C. N D. G
（ ）5. A. F B. S C. T D. X
（ ）6. A. sit B. this C. bike D. milk
（ ）7. A. apple B. eraser C. name D. late
（ ）8. A. desk B. pencil C. bell D. evening
（ ）9. A. go B. no C. not D. phone
（ ）10. A. great B. please C. read D. teacher
二. 单项选择：
（ ）1. I ______ Tom. What ______ your name
A. am, am B. am, is C. is, is D. is, am
（ ）2. －Sit down, please. －______.
A. Fine B. Thank you C. Thanks you D. Yes
（ ）3. －What’s this －______.
A. It’s pen B. This is pen
C. It’s a pen D. This is an pen
（ ）4. －What’s that －_______.
A. It’s milk B. That is a milk
C. It’s a milk D. That’s an milk
（ ）5. _____ is my friend.
A. Mr Frank B. Frank Mr C. Mr Black D. Black Mr
（ ）6. ______ is a good girl.
A. Michael B. Colin C. Walter D. Tina
（ ）7. I’m an English boy. My name’s _______.
A. Amy B. David C. Nancy D. Julia
（ ）8. －What color is our national（国家的）flag
－It’s _______.
A. a red B. red C. orange D. an orange
（ ）9. Let’s _______ the map.
A. look B. look at C. look to D. see
（ ）10. －What’s this _____ －It’s a hat.
A. in the English B. in English C. for English D. at English
三. 根据句意用正确的词填空。
1. What’s ________name
2. Good ______, （晚上好）Mrs. Green.
3. How do you do ______
4. －What’s this in ______ －It’s a map.
5. There is _______ “X”in the word“box”.
四. 补全对话。
（A）
Ivy: Hi, Ms. Jean.
Ms. Jean: 1 , Ivy.
Ivy: Ms. Jean, this is Mike. Mike, 2 3 Ms. Jean.
Ms. Jean: How do you do
Mike: 4 Nice to meet you.
Ms. Jean: 5 , too.
Mike: Oh, Ms. Jean, what’s this in English
Ms. Jean: 6 a letter.
Mike: 7 8 is it
Ms. Jean: It’s blue.
五. 完型填空：
从所给句子中选择恰当的一项完成对话，有两个句子是多余的。
A. It’s Kay. B. Nice to see you, Beth.
C. Nice to meet you, too. D. It’s green.
E. I’m Eli. F. Thank you.
G. It’s a hat. H. That’s right.
I. Yes. J-A-M-E-S, James. J. It’s Dianhua.
K. All right. L. That’s all right.
1. What’s your name, please ______
2. Sorry, I am late. ______
3. Who’s that ______
4. What’s this ______
5. Nice to meet you. ______
6. Can you spell your name ______
7. Draw a TV, please. ______
8. What color is it ______
9. What’s the Chinese for “phone” ______
10. This is Beth, John. ______
六. 阅读理解
A
My name is Kate. I am eleven. This is my school. I study at No.2 Middle School. Mr. Lee is my teacher. My friend is Jane. She is a student, too. We are in the same school. I am in Class Three. She’s in Class One.
判断正误。
（ ）1. Kate is a girl. Her friend Jane is a boy.
（ ）2. Kate is eleven. Jane is eleven, too.
（ ）3. Kate and Jane are in the same school.
（ ）4. Kate and Jane are in different classes.
（ ）5. Mr. Lee is their teacher.
B拓展阅读
（ ）1. _____ is the youngest in the family
A. Jane B. John C. Tom D. Gina
（ ）2. Gina is a ______.
A. man B. baby C. woman D. girl
（ ）3. Tom’s mother is ________ years old.
A. forty two B. forty C. twelve D. ten
（ ）4. Gina is Tom’s ________.
A. father B. mother C. sister D. brother
（ ）5. There are _______ people in the family.
A. one B. two C. three D. four
七. 仔细看下列标志，说出其中的含义。
【试题答案】
一. 1－5 ABBCC 6－10 CADCA
二. 1－5 BBCAC 6－10 DBBBB
三. 1. your 2. evening 3. How do you do
4. English 5. an
四. 1. Hi 2. this 3. is
4. How do you do 5. Nice to meet you
6. It’s 7. What 8. color
五. 1－5 ELAGC 6－10 IKDJB
六. A. 1. F 2. T 3. T 4. T 5. F
B. 1. D 2. D 3. B 4. C 5. D
七. A. No photos! 禁止拍照！
B. No parking! 禁止停车！
C. No smoking! 禁止吸烟！
D. Don’t turn left.禁止左转。
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 2 页 共 8 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
Unit 1 My name’s Gina.
（一）语言目标（Language Goals）
Introduce yourself
Greet people
Ask for and give telephone numbers
（二）语言结构（Language Structure）
Present tense to be
What questions
Possessive adjectives my, your, his, her
（三）主要句型（Target Language）
1. What’s your / his / her name
2. My / his / her name is Lucy Smith.
3. Nice to meet you!
4. What’s your telephone number
5. My telephone number is 5634-6907.
6. What’s your / his / her family name / given name
（四）重点难点解析
1. 物主代词。
（1）表示所有关系的代词叫物主代词，本课所介绍的是形容词性物主代词，它们一般放在所修饰名词的前面，同时它们也有人称和数的变化。形容词性物主代词的前后是不出现冠词的，这是在书写句子时最容易犯的错误。如：my father, his desk, our room, their names, your aunt等。
（2）形容词性物主代词的用法。
形容词性物主代词起形容词作用，在句中只能作定语，也就是说它后面必须跟一个名词。如：
This is my bike. 这是我的自行车。
Miss Gao is our English teacher.
高小姐是我们的英语老师。
I don’t know her name.
我不知道她的名字。
即：形容词性物主代词＋名词
注意：形容词性的物主代词见下表：
形容词性代词 my your his her its our your their
中文 我的 你的 他的 她的 它的 我们的 你们的 他/她/它们的
如my backpack我的书包；my new backpack我的新书包。
△物主代词有人称、数和性的变化，即第一、二、三人称；单数和复数；他、她、它。
△物主代词根据语法功能不同可分为形容词性的物主代词和名词性的物主代词（即具有名词的性质）。
如：My ruler is red. Yours（= your ruler）is yellow.
我的尺是红色的，你的是黄色的。
△本单元只要求同学们掌握my、your、his、it的用法。
△it’s≠its
it’s与its是两个极易出错的词。it’s＝it is，是it is的缩写，其中it是人称代词；its的意思是“它的”物主代词。如：
－What’s that 那是什么？
－It’s a cat. Its name is Mimi.
它是一只猫，它的名字叫咪咪。
例：选用方框内所给的单词填空。
your, I, her, its, his, first, last, it, he, you, she
（1）This is a boy. _____ name is Tom.（看清上下文，前后人称一致吗？）
（2）That is a girl. _________ name is Kate.
（3）______ am a girl.（am与什么搭配？）
（4）Look at the cat. _______ name is Mimi.
（5）His ________ name is Smith. We call him Mr Smith.（分清姓与名）
（6）My _____ name is Peter. Mum calls me Peter.
（7）－What is _____name
－My name’s Huang Lin.
（8）Nice to meet _____.
（9）－What’s that
－_____ is a VCD.
（10）This is Ms Green. _____is our English teacher.
That is Mr Li. _____is our Chinese teacher.（Mr与Ms分别指男性、女性）
［解析］此题主要考查代词的用法。由上面的讲解和题意可知。
［答案］（1）His（2）Her（3）I（4）Its（5）last（6）first（7）your（8）you（9）It（10）She（Ms Green格林女士）He（李先生）
2. to be的用法
同学们，到目前为止，我们已学过了am, is, are这三个动词，它们的汉语意思均为“是”。在英语表达中起着重要的作用。为了利于同学们学好英语，避免出现“无‘是’生非”现象，现就其基本用法归纳如下：
（1）am, is, are这三个动词常用作连系动词，用来表示人或事物的性质、状态等，在句中起连接主语和表语的作用，相当于主语和表语之间的一座桥梁。如：
This is my mother. 这是我妈妈。
You are a student.你是一名学生。
（2）am, is, are的基本意思是“是”，但应注意的是汉语有时不译出“是”，翻译成英语句子时切不可遗漏“是”（am, is, are），否则就会出现“无‘是’生非”的现象，如
What’s your name 你叫什么？
My name is Zhang Ce. 我叫张策。
（3）记住它们与主语的搭配。
I＋am
they / you +are
it / she / he +is
I am here. 我在这里。
This is my bag. 这是我的书包。
His name is Bob. 他的名字叫鲍勃。
Tom is a good boy. 汤姆是个好男孩。
You are my good friend. 你是我的好朋友。
注意：I am 可缩写为I’m；
His name is 可缩写为His name’s；
You are可缩写为You’re；
What is 可缩写为What’s。
用am、is、are填空。
（1）－Hi, I _______ Franciso, what _______ your name
－My name _______ Li sa.
（2）Hello! How ________ you I ______ fine, thank you.
（3）－What ______ your telephone number
－It ________ 555-80.
（4）Who _______ this It’s Tom.
（5）_____ her first name Gina
Yes, it is. （句首第一个字母要大写）
［解析］此题主要考查be动词的用法，解此题的关键是要弄清be动词与主语的搭配关系如：I +am我是；you +are你是；it + is它是；this +is这是。
［答案］（1）am, is, is（2）are, am（3）is, is（4）is（5）Is
3. Numbers in English英语中的数字
本单元出现了1－10这十个英文数字，数字在日常生活中应用十分广泛，例如：电话号码、门牌号码、身份证号、信用卡号、各种密码等等，可以说如今的世界真是一个数码世界。我们把one, two, three等表示数目多少的词称为基数词。它可以表示编号事物、年代、时间，还可以表示加减乘除运算，有的基数词还可以构成固定词组。
（1）数字表示编号的事物
Lesson Four第四课 Room 208第208号房间
No. 2 Middle School二中 Tel 55587720 电话：55587720
（2）英文电话号码的读法
<1>把号码中的阿拉伯数字，用英语依次读出即可：如86753281，读成Eight, six, seven, five, three, two, eight, one.
<2>如果号码中有0，就读成字母O。如86084035读成：
Eight, six, O, eight, four, O, three, five
<3>如果有两个相同的数字在一起读作double / /。如：87508821读成Eight, seven, five, O, double eight, two, one.
（3）数字加法的表达方式
6＋4＝？这个算式在英语中说成What’s six and four 回答It’s ten.（六加四等于几。等于十。）再如：
7＋8＝15，用英语表达为：Seven and eight is fifteen（15）.
（4）年龄的表达法及其提问
要表达你多大了，你几岁了，你多大年龄了，英文里说“How old are you ”答句为“I’m＋一个基数词。”例如：
How old are you I’m nine. 你多大了？我9岁。
例1：
读下面这段自我介绍，然后选用方框中的词语填空。（哪些是专用名词？）
One unit, Unit One, Grade Seven, Five Number, Number Five, 3 Row, Row Three, ten, Ten
Hi, I’m Han Meimei. I’m （1）. I’m in Class Two, （2）. Li Ping is in Row Three. I’m in （3）, too. I’m （4）. Now let’s read （5）.
［解析］由题意可知，此题考查的是用数词表示编号的事物、并表示一个集体的名称，这个将数字放在名词之后的集体名词，应视为专有名词，要大写。如Grade Seven（七年级），Row Three（三排），Number Five（5号），Unit One（一单元）。
［答案］（1）ten（十岁）（2）Grade Seven（3）Row Three（4）Number Five（5）Unit One
例2：
用阿拉伯数字和英语数字写出下列算式的答案。
（1）Six +one = （2）Four - two=
（3）Ten-five= （4）Eight +two=
（5）Seven-three= （6）One+ eight=
（7）Five and five =
［答案］
（1）seven, 7 （2）two, 2 （3）five, 5
（4）ten, 10 （5）four, 4 （6）nine, 9
（7）ten, 10
4. first name名字 last name姓氏
英文姓名通常由两部分组成，前面是名（first name），后面是姓氏（last name / family name）。有时在名和姓之间有一个middle name。如：
Tom Smith汤姆·史密斯 Jenny Green詹妮·格林
Jim Allan Green吉姆·艾伦·格林
英文名（first name）有男女之分。如：
Bob Peter David Jim均是男名
Jenny Mary Gina Linda均是女名
英美人姓氏的由来
英美人的姓名很有意思。据记载，姓氏在形成的过程中受到以下各种因素的影响：
（1）以职业名称为姓。英语国家中的Carpenter（卡彭特），Thatcher（撒切尔），Tailor（泰勒），Smith（史密斯），Baker（贝克）等姓氏源于木匠、盖屋顶的人、裁缝、铁匠、面包师傅等。
（2）以居住地的城镇或村庄的名称为姓，比如York（约克），Kent（肯特）等。
（3）以居住地附近的地表地貌为姓。如：Moor（穆尔），Hill（希尔），Wood（伍德）等姓原是荒野、小山和树林的意思。
（4）以个人特征为姓。Small（斯斯尔），Long（朗），Wise（怀斯），便分别是“小个子”、“大个子”、“聪明”等个人身体或个性特征。
（5）有一部分带有浓厚宗教色彩的姓名。如Adam（亚当）→基督教《圣经》中的“人类始祖”；John（约翰）→基督教耶稣的12门徒之一等。
（6）某些英语姓氏的前面带有Mac或（Mc）或O之类的前缀，比如MacArthur（麦克阿瑟），McCarthy（麦卡锡），O’Neil（奥尼尔）等。前缀Mac或Mc说明姓该姓的人是苏格兰人的后代，O表示爱尔兰人的后代。
（7）英美人的有些名字源于外来语，如Martinez（马丁内斯），Carcia（加西亚）等就来自于西班牙语。
（8）英美人的有些姓名来源于颜色。如Green（格林）就是“绿色”的意思；再如White（怀特），Brown（布朗），Black（布莱克）就是源于白色、棕色、黑色之意。
5. 英语中的称呼
地区间的文化都是有差异的。比如在中国，人们在谈论彼此的年龄、工资等话题时是没有多少顾忌的；但在西方国家，这样的话题可是禁区。我们学习英语就是要掌握一种获得信息、了解世界的工具。了解外国的文化背景、风俗习惯及各地的文化差异，都是英语学习的主要内容。下面给大家介绍美国有关名字的习俗：
在某些地区文化中，人们可以只用姓氏来称呼一个人，这种称呼法在有些地方还是很常见的。但是在美国，人们一般不这样用，如果用姓氏来称呼，通常要在姓的前面加上Ms，Miss，Mrs or Mr。你知道它们是怎样用的吗？所有的男士，不论他结婚与否，都可以在姓前面加Mr来称呼；Mrs用来称呼已婚女士；Miss用来称呼未婚女士；无论结婚与否，所有的女士都可以用Ms来称呼。但是人们通常不用这些来称呼自己的亲密朋友、子女和亲戚，他们之间会用first name或first name的简称或昵称来称呼，以表示关系亲密。昵称在美国非常常见，如果一个人没有昵称，他会很难过的。下面是几个非常常见的昵称，Becky（Rebecca）, Jim（James），Liz/ Betty（Elizabeth）。如果你遇到一个和你年龄相仿的美国人，你问他是否可以用昵称来称呼他，他会非常高兴的。
6.
英语人名集锦
男名 含义
Alan 艾伦 英俊的
David 戴维 可爱的人；朋友
Edward 爱德华 富有的
George 乔治 耕种者
Frank 弗兰克 自由人
Bill 比尔 勇敢的卫士
Harry 哈里 家族统治者
Henry 亨利 家长
Jim 吉姆 上帝的恩典
Mark 马克 战争之神
Marlon 马龙 猎鹰的人
Michael 迈克尔 酷似上帝的人
Owen 欧文 年轻的战士
Paul 保罗 小家伙
Philip 菲利浦 战士
Richard 理查德 勇敢的
Robert 罗伯特 盛名
Robin 罗宾 显赫的声誉
Roy 罗伊 国王
Thomas 托马斯 太阳神
Victor 维克托 胜利者
Walter 沃尔特 统治
William 威廉 战士；保卫者
女名 含义
Betty 贝蒂 上帝的誓约
Catherine 凯瑟琳 纯洁的人
Charlotte 夏洛特 有男子气概的
Daisy 黛西 雏菊
Diana 黛安娜 月亮
Emma 爱玛 无所不能的
Grace 格雷斯 优雅的
Helen 海伦 光彩照人的女孩
Jane 简 少女
Joan 琼 上帝仁慈的赐予
Judy 朱蒂 赞美
June 琼 六月
Laura 劳拉 月桂树
Linda 琳达 美丽的人
Lily 莉莉 百合花
Lucy 露西 带来光明的人
Maria 玛丽亚 悲苦的
May 梅 少女
Susan 苏珊 一朵小百合
Rose 罗斯 玫瑰花
7. what’s … 句型
英语中用于提出疑问的句子叫疑问句，如What is your name 你的名字叫什么？Who’s that 那是谁？其中what（什么）、who（谁）叫特殊疑问词，以特殊疑问词开头的句子叫特殊疑问句。从预备篇到《新目标》的Unit One我们学了不少以What’s...开头的疑问句，这是一个在口语中很常见的句型。
（1）用来询问姓名
What’s your name 你叫什么名字？My name’s Gina. 我叫吉娜。
（2）询问某个东西是什么？
What’s this in English 用英语说这是什么？It’s a phone. 一个电话机。
（3）询问颜色
What colour is her bag 她的书包是什么颜色的？It’s yellow. 黄色的。
（4）询问各种号码
What’s your phone / car / bike / QQ number 你的电话号码是多少？（汽车牌照/自行车/QQ号）
My phone number is 88070208. 我的电话号码是88070208。
（5）询问其他方面的情况
What class / grade / row are you in 你在几班/年级/排？
I’m in Class One. / Grade 2. / Row3. 我在一班/二年级/三排。
What’s your address（地址）？
你的地址是什么？
It’s 88 Green Street.
格林大街88号。
What’s CCTV’s web site
中央电视台的网址是什么？
It’s www..是www.。
例：句子配对。
（ ）（1）It’s a cake.
（ ）（2）It’s 027-88070208.
（ ）（3）It’s B51174.
（ ）（4）It’s ten.
（ ）（5）It’s black.
（ ）（6）It’s Black
（ ）（7）My name is Franciso.
（ ）（8）I’m 12.
（ ）（9）I’m in Class 4.
（ ）（10）Hi, I’m Gina. Nice to meet you.
A. What’s your name
B. What’s your family （last）name
C. What’s your car number
D. What’s your phone number
E. What’s six and four
F. How old are you
G. What colour is your bike
H. What class are you in
I. Hi, I’m Jenny.
J. What’s that in English
［解析］此题主要考查what’s...句型在日常生活中的广泛应用，由上栏可知。
［答案］（1）J（2）D（3）C（4）E（5）G（6）B（7）A（8）F（9）H（10）I
8. How to make an ID card in English 怎样用英语制作学生证？
△制作学生证或个人名片应包括以下内容及信息
（1）设计名片的形状
（2）基本信息、姓名、年龄、地址、电话号码等
（3）表示个人信息的相关词汇
例1
看David的学生证，然后照样子，给自己制作学生证。
Personal Information（个人信息）
First name（名）David戴维
Last name（姓）Smith史密斯
Sex（性别）M（男）
School（学校）
No. 1 Middle School 第一中学
例2 给同学们提供一些思路及表示个人信息的相关词汇：范例
【模拟试题】（答题时间：80分钟）
I. 将A组姓名按名（first name）和姓（last name）进行分类，将B组名字按男性（male）和女性（female）进行分类（5分）
A）Peter, George, Williams, James, Tony, Amy, Brown, Gina, Bush, Hunt
1. First name：______________________________
2. Last name：______________________________
B）Frank, Emma, David, Catherine, Tina, Alice, Philip, Mary, Tom, John
3. Male：______________________________
4. Female：______________________________
II. 用正确的代词补全句子（5分）
1. Look at the girl! What is _______ name
2. Tom is my friend. ______ family name is Smith.
3. －What is ________ phone number, Amy
－_______ is 33356.
4. －Are ______ Kate
－Yes, I am.
III. 用缩写词的形式重抄下列句子（5分）
1. My name is Marco.
________________________
2. What is your name
________________________
3. I am a student.
________________________
4. It is 456098.
________________________
5. You are my good friend.
________________________
IV. 用am, is, are填空（5分）
1. I _______ Peter Hunt.
2. My name _______Bill.
3. I _______twelve.
4. My family name_______White.
5. _______she Kate
6. Her name _______Gina.
7. _______your phone number 22335
8. _______you Tom
9. It _______my book.
10. My teacher_______Mr Green.
V. 用英语完成下列算式（5分）
1. six +one =_______ 2. ______ -two = two
3. _______-five= five 4. _______+two = ten
5. five-three=_______ 6. nine-six=_______
7. five+four=_______ 8. _______+eight=nine
9. _______+three=nine 10. five+five=_______
VI. 单项选择：
（ ）1. My name’s ____. I am an English boy.
A. Green Gina B. Gina Green C. Brown John D. John Brown
（ ）2. My father is a teacher. ________ phone number is 546807.
A. He B. His C. She D. Her
（ ）3. ________ name is Tony and ________ name is Lucy.
A. Her, his B. His, her
C. Her, her D. His, his
（ ）4. －What’s your car number
－______ 665488.
A. I’m B. I am C. It’s D. My car
VII. 单选2
1. Her name is Amy Green. Her last name is _________.
A. Amy B. Green C. Amy Green D. Green Amy
2. _____ minus（减去）three is four.
A. One B. Eight C. Seven D. Nine
3. ______ her name
A. What’s B. What C. How D. How’s
4. _______ last name is Lope.
A. She B. Her C. You D. He
5. How _______ your sister
A. are B. is C. am D. be
6. Is your name Brown ________
A. Yes, it is. B. Yes, I am.
C. Yes, I’m. D. No, I’m no.
7. －What’s her telephone number
－______.
A. It’s 027-2806543 B. She is 13
C. It’s her telephone number D. Her is 4265830
8. －My name is Mary Brown.
－What’s your _______ name
－Brown.
A. first B. full C. family D. nick
9. What ________ four and five ______ nine.
A. are, They are B. is, It’s
C. is, Its D. are, It’s
10. In English, last name is ________ name.
A. full B. first C. family D. given
11. In Chinese, first name is ________ name.
A. full B. last C. family D. given
12. The man’s name is Peter Mark. We can call him ________.
A. Mr Peter B. Mr Mark
C. Sir Mark D. Mark
13. －Good morning, Miss Yang. How are you
－________
A. I’m good. B. I’m fine, thank you.
C. How are you D. Good afternoon.
14. －How do you do
－_______
A. Hello. B. How are you
C. How do you do D. I’m fine, thank you.
15. －Hi Mary, Nice to meet you.
－______
A. Hello, Jenny. Nice to meet you.
B. I’m fine.
C. Good morning.
D. How are you
VIII. 阅读理解。（10分）
Look! What a nice car it is! I don’t think that is an English car. It’s a Japanese car. Its number is 86302. It’s Mrs Green’s car, I guess.
Yes, She is coming this way.（朝这边来了）Mrs Green is my Japanese teacher. She is very old. But she’s very good. Her Chinese name is Chen Ping. She likes us very much.
1. Mrs Chen is my _________ teacher.
A. English B. Chinese C. Japanese D. new
2. Her car is _______.
A. Japanese B. English C. Chinese D. old
3. The car’s number is _______.
A. eight-six-two-O-three
B. eight-two-six-O-three
C. eight-six-three-O-two
D. eight-three-two-O-six
4. She likes her ________ very much.
A. books B. car C. students D. bags
5. Mrs Green’s Chinese name is _______.
A. Chen Bing B. Wang Lan
C. Shen Ping D. Chen Ping
IX. 完成对话。（10分）
1. 根据问句写答语。（5分）
（1）_________ His name is Peter
（2）_________ My phone number is 555-8906
（3）_________ My last name is Perez.
（4）_________ My first name is Marco.
（5）_________ Her name is Alice.
2. 根据实际情况，用完整的句子回答下列问题（5分）
（1）What’s your first name _________
（2）What’s your last name _________
（3）What’s your phone number _________
（4）How old are you _________
（5）What class are you in _________
X. 写作园地。（20分）
1. 请为我做一张学生名片吧！（10分）
I’m Alice Red. I’m in Class 3, Grade 1. I want an ID card. Can you help me My telephone number is 665324. Thank you.
2. Ken Martin和Alice Johnson第一次在路上遇见，请写出他们两人互相介绍认识，并留下联系方式的对话。（10分）
XI. 根据下面两张名片回答问题（5分）
Sichuan Foreign College
Professor Zhao Bi
Lieshimu Road Shapingba, Chongqing, China 400016
Tel: 023-65879348 Fax: 023-65879456
E-mail: Zhaobi@
Tiantai Taxi Company
Driver Xie Zhongqing
235 Tongzhi Street, Hangzhou, Zhejiang 310007
E-mail: xizhq@tioc. Tel: 0571-7038385
Fax: 0571-7065843
小词典：foreign外国的 language语言
college学院 professor教授
taxi出租车 company公司
driver司机 street街道
1. Who is a teacher
_________________________
2. Who is a driver
_________________________
3. What’s Zhao Bi’s phone number
_________________________
4. What’s Xie Zhongqing’s phone number
_________________________
5. What’s Xie Zhongqing’s address（地址）？
_________________________
XII. 读下面的短文，制做一张学生卡（5分）
My name is Charlie Street. I’m not twelve. I’m eleven. I’m not in Grade Eight. I am in Grade Seven. I am in Class Three. My phone number is 6655882. I’m from the U.S.A. My school is Beijing No. 14 Middle School.
Student’s Card
Name: ________ Sex: F/M________
First name: ________ Family name: ________
Age: ________ Tel: ________
Class: ________ Grade: ________
Nationality（国籍）：________
School: ________________________
【试题答案】
I A）1. Peter, George, Tony, Amy, Gina
2. Williams, James, Brown, Bush, Hunt
B）3. Frank, David, Philip, Tom, John
4. Emma, Catherine, Tina, Alice, Mary
II. 1. her 2. His 3. your, It 4. you
III. 1. My name’s Marco. 2. What’s your name
3. I’m a student. 4. It’s 456098. 5. You’re my good friend.
IV. 1. am 2. is 3. am 4. is 5. Is
6. is 7. Is 8. Are 9. is 10. is
V. 1. seven 2. four 3. ten 4. eight 5. two
6. three 7. nine 8. one 9. six 10. ten
VI. 1. D 2. B 3. B 4. C
VII. 1.B 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. B 6. A 7. A 8. C
9. B 10. C 11. C 12. B 13. B 14. C 15. A
VIII. 1.C 2. A 3. C 4. C 5. D
IX. 1. （1） What’s his name
（2）What’s your phone number
（3）What’s your last name
（4）What’s your first name
（5）What’s her name
2. 略
X. 略
XI. 1. Zhao Bi 2. Xie Zhongqing 3. 023-65879348 4. 0571-7038385
5. 235 Tongzhi Street, Hangzhou, Zhejiang
XII. Student’s Card
Name: Charlie Street_ Sex: F/M_M_
First name: Charlie _ Family name: Street_
Age: 11_ Tel: 6655882_
Class: 3_ Grade: ___7_____
Nationality（国籍）：_U.S.A.__
School: Beijing No. 14 Middle School
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 1 页 共 13 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
Unit 11 What time do you go to school
［教学内容］
一. Language Goals（目标）
1. Talk about routines. 谈论日常生活作息习惯。
2. Ask about and say time. 询问和表达时间。
二. Language structure（结构）
1. 行为动词的一般现在时。
2. 特殊疑问句，when和what time。
3. 关于频度副词always, usually, often, sometimes的使用。
三. Target Language. 目标语言。
1. What time do you get up
I get up at six o’clock.
2. What time does he eat breakfast
He eats breakfast at seven o’clock.
3. What time does she go to school
She goes to school at eight o’clock.
4. When do people usually eat dinner
People usually eat dinner in the evening.
5. What time is it
It’s eight-thirty.
四. Key Phrases（重点词组）
△动词短语
get up 起床
get home到达家中
get to work到达工作岗位
make breakfast做早饭
make a shower schedule 做一个洗澡的安排
practice guitar 练吉它
leave home 离家
take a shower = have a shower 洗淋浴澡
take the Number 17 bus to the Santon Hotel
乘17路公共汽车去Santon 旅馆
go to class 上课
go to school 上学
go to work 上班（反义词 go home）
have breakfast/dinner/lunch 吃早、晚、午饭
go to bed 睡觉（反义词get up）
put on 穿衣服（反义词take off）
do one’s homework 做家庭作业
tell sb. about sth. 告诉某人某事
know about sth. 知道某方面的情况
love to do ＝ like to do 喜欢干某事
listen to the early morning news on radio
听电台早间新闻
watch the early morning news on TV
看电视早间新闻
△其他短语
around six o’clock 六点左右
in the morning 在早上
in the afternoon 在下午
in the evening 在晚上
listen to 听…
五. Key Points （疑难解析）
1. What time is it It’s …
这是询问时间的惯用法，如：
A: Excuse me. What time is it, please
请问几点了？
B: It’s nine o’clock. 九点了。
英语时间的表达
（1）整点时间可表示为“钟点数＋o’clock”或直接读钟点数，省去o’clock。如：
It’s ten o’clock a. m. 现在是上午十点整。
（2）非整点时间可直接采取读数法。如：
It’s eight-thirty. 是八点三十分。
注意时间的表达方式：用数词。点与分钟之间用连字如：
eleven-thirty 十一点三十分
nine-twenty-five 九点二十五分
6:10 →six-ten 8:50→eight-fifty
9:30→nine-thirty 10:15→ten-fifteen
7:45→seven forty-five 11:05→eleven-five
（3）非整点时间的分钟数不超过30分钟，也可用介词“past”。如：
6:10→ten past six
11:05→five past eleven
10:15→ a quarter past ten或fifteen past ten
8:15→a quarter past eight或fifteen past eight
9:30→half past nine或thirty past nine
（4）非整点时间的分钟数超过30分钟，用介词to。如：
11:50→ten to twelve
7:31→twenty-nine to eight
9:45→a quarter to ten或fifteen to ten
12:59→one to thirteen
此句话还有几种表达方式。如：
What is the time 几点了？
What time is it by your watch 你的手表几点了？
用英语大声说出下列表格中的时间
A: What’s the time, please
B: It’s twelve o’clock.
8:05 o five.8:10 ten.8:15 It’s eight fifteen.8:25 twenty-five.8:30 thirty. OR five tenIt’s a quarter past eight. twenty-five half
8:35 thirth-five.8:40 forty.8:45 It’s eight forty-five.8:50 fifty.8:55 fifty-five. OR twenty-five twentyIt’s a quarter to nine ten five
2. what time与when
what time翻译为“几点”问的是具体的时间，一般回答要具体到小时。
What time do you go to school
你什么时候/几点上学？
I go to school at half past seven o’clock.
我七点半去上学。
回答具体到点钟，且注意在几点前边的介词用at。
when也是对时间的提问，但与what time的区别是：用when提问，回答既可以是具体的时间，也可以是不具体的时间，如：in the morning，last year，in 1998等范围大的时间，例如：When does he take a shower？他什么时候洗澡？
He takes a shower in the morning.
他在早上洗澡。
也可用具体时间：
I take a shower at 6 o’clock in the morning.
我早上六点洗澡。
例. 对下列划线部分提问，将句子变为特殊疑问句。
（1）It’s seven o’clock.
__________ __________ is it
（2）He was born in 1992.
__________ was __________ born
解析：本题主要考查when与what time如何询问时间。
答案：（1）What time （2）When, he
3. 关于一般现在时。（语法重点）
（1）一般现在时态的意义是：①表示现在的特征或状态。如：He is at home today. 他今天在家。②表示经常性、习惯性的动作。常和频率副词always, often, usually及every day等表示时间的短语连用。如：I go to school at 7:00 every day. 我每天7点钟去上学。③表示主语具备的性格或能力。如：She likes pears very much. 她非常喜欢梨子。They speak English. 他们讲英语。
（2）肯定陈述句：当主语是第一、二和第三人称复数时，谓语动词用原形。当主语是第三人称单数时，谓语动词用第三人称单数形式。例如：
①They stay at home on Sundays.
他们星期天呆在家。
②He does his homework in the evening.
他在晚上做作业。
（3）否定句：当主语是第一、二及第三人称复数时，否定句借助助动词do＋not，当主语是第三人称单数时，否定句借用does＋not，并将动词第三人称单数还原。例如：
①They don’t stay at home on Sundays.
他们星期天不呆在家里。
②He doesn’t do his homework in the evening.
他晚上不做作业。
（4）疑问句：当主语是第一、第二及第三人称复数时，疑问句在句首加Do。当主语是第三人称单数时，疑问句在句首加Does，并把谓语第三人称单数还原。例如：
①Do they stay at home on Sundays
他们星期天呆在家吗？
②Does he do his homework in the evening
他晚上做作业吗？
△以speak为例归纳动词do的各种句式：
肯定式 否定式
I speak English.You speak English.He/She/It speaks English.We/You/They speak English. I do not (don’t) speak English.You do not (don’t) speak English.He/She/It does not (doesn’t) speak English.We/You/They do not (don’t) speak English.
疑问式和简略答语
Do I speak English Yes, you do.No, you do not (don’t).Do we speak English Yes, we/you do.No, we/you do not (don’t). Do you speak English Yes, I do.No, I do not (don’t).Do you speak English Yes, we do.No, we do not(don’t). Does he/she/it speak English.Yes, he/she/it does.No, he/she/it does not (doesn’t).Do they speak English Yes, they do.No, they do not (don’t).
（1）We __________ (get up/gets up) at seven every morning.
（2）Jane __________ (don’t wake up/doesn’t wake up) at six every morning.
（3）My father often __________ (drink/drinks) lemonade for breakfast.
（4）____________（Does, Do）the girl often __________ (draw/draws)pictures in the park
（5）My friend often __________ (come/comes) to school by bus.
（6）____________ (Does, Do) Sally and Ann often __________ (read/reads) English in class
（7）Jim __________ (doesn’t do/doesn’t) his homework after supper every day.
（8）Jone __________ (go/goes) home at 4:00 in the afternoon.
答案：（1）get up （2）doesn’t wake up （3）drinks
（4）Does, draw （5）comes （6）Do, read
（7）doesn’t do （8）goes
解析：本题考查一般现在时的各种句型。
（1）主语是we，与谓语动词原形搭配。
（2）考查否定句，由于主语是第三人称单数，助动词应相应变化。
（3）主语是第三人称单数。
（4）行为动词是一般现在时的疑问句，主语the girl是第三人称单数，助动词应选相应的Does，后面的动词则用原形，选draw。
（5）此题与（3）题考点相同，选comes。
（6）此题与（4）小题考点一样，但主语Sally and Ann相当于they，不是单数，答案为Do, read。
（7）此题较难，不能丢了第二个do，它是主语的动词译为“做”，答案为doesn’t do。
（8）考点与（3）、（5）相同。
4. always, usually, often 和sometimes
这四个副词表示行动或动作的频率。频率最高的是always（总是），其次是usually（通常，总是），often（经常，时常），sometimes（有时），使用时要注意它们在句中的位置。由于频率副词表示的是经常性的、一般性的动作或情况，不是具体指某一次，因此常常和一般现在时连用，常位于行为动词前面，其他动词（指be动词、情态动词和助动词）的后面。本单元重点学习usually“通常”。
如：When do you usually get up
你通常什么时候起床？
I usually get up at six o’clock.
我通常六点起床。
What time does your sister usually get up
你妹妹通常什么时候起床？
She usually gets up at 6:30.
她通常6：30起床。
5. 在本单元中，出现了大量的动词短语，我们通过下面的题目来巩固一下。
填空完成短文，注意词形变化。
Scott works very ___1___ （长时间地）. He usually ___2___ （起床） at 17:00. He ___3___ （洗澡）and ___4___ （做早饭）. What a funny time to make breakfast! ___5___ （早饭后）, he practices his guitar, then he ___6___ （穿上）his jacket and ___7___（上班）. ___8___ （为了到达工作岗位）. He ___9___ （乘17路公汽） to the Santon Hotel. The bus usually leaves at 9:15. He works ___10___ （通宵）. People love ___11___ （听他说话）! He ___12___ （到家）at 7:00 and watches the early morning news on TV. He ___13___ （睡觉） at 8:30, a tired but happy man. Can you think what his job is
解析：这篇短文是本单元67页上的阅读文章，出现了不少习惯用语，同学们一定要大声反复诵读直到脱口而出，增加语感，品味出词语在具体语境中的用法，从而将知识和能力融合为一体，举一反三，灵活运用。另外，一般现在时第三人称单数形式仍然是难点，不少同学，一看就会，一听就懂。可是一开口、一动手就错，什么原因呢？就是练习少了，用中国的思维方式学英语，解决这个问题的惟一办法就是行动起来，参与交际活动，反复应用，脱口而出。学地道的英语，不是一味地背语法条款。
答案：（1）long hours （复数）
（2）gets up （第三人称单数）
（3）takes/has a shower（第三人称单数）
（4）makes (his) breakfast
（5）After breakfast（表示时间的介词短语）
（6）puts on
（7）goes to work
（8）To get to work （动词不定式）
（9）takes the Number 17 bus
（10）all night
（11）to listen to him （动词不定式）
（12）gets home
（13）goes to bed
6. What a funny time to make breakfast! 多么可笑的做早饭的时间啊！
这是一个以what开头的感叹句，不是特殊疑问句。
△感叹句用来表示感情的喜、怒、哀、乐等，其结构为感叹词（what, how）＋强调成分＋主语＋动词等。what用来强调句中的名词，how用来强调句中的形容词、副词或动词。例如：
What a fine day it is today! 今天天气多好啊！
What interesting books they are! 多有趣的书啊！
How beautiful the garden is! 这个花园多美呀！
例. It is an interesting movie. （将句子变为以what和how开头的感叹句，句意相近）
（1）_________ _________ _________ movie it is!
（2）_________ interesting the movie is!
解析：本题考查感叹句的结构。
答案：（1）What an interesting
（2）How
7. listen to, hear和sound
△listen to意为“注意听”，表示有意识地去听，但不一定听得见什么，强调听的动作。（listen不及物，listen to及物）如：
They are listening to the teacher. 他们在听老师说。
△hear意为“听见”，表示耳朵里听到了，但不一定有意识地听，强调听的结果。如：
I’m sorry to hear that.
听到那个消息我很难过。
△sound意为“听起来，听上去”，可作连系动词，后接形容词作表语，还可以和like连用。例如：
The music sounds sweet. 这音乐听起来悦耳。
例. 用hear, listen to, sound填空。
（1）Be quiet! （安静）_________ _________ the actor. I can’t _________ him.
（2）Let’s play basketball.
That _________ good.
解析：（1）句意：安静！听演员说。我听不见他的话。第一个“听”强调听的过程。第二个听强调听的结果（听不见）。
（2）句意：我们打篮球吧！听上去不错。
答案：（1）Listen, to, hear
（2）sounds
8. To get to work, he takes the number 17 bus to the Saite Hotel.
为了赶去上班，他要乘坐去赛特宾馆的17路公共汽车。
（1）to get to work 是动词不定式作目的状语。
（2）take a bus 表示“乘坐公共汽车”。如：
I get to school at 8:15. 我八点一刻到达学校。
9. Thanks for your letter. 谢谢你的来信。
Thanks for… 谢谢……，其后接名词，或相当于名词的词。如：
Thanks for your help. 多谢你的帮忙。
Thanks for coming to see me. 谢谢来看我。
10. I usually get up at around six fifteen.
我通常在大约六点一刻时起床。
around 表示“大约”的意思。
around 还可表示“在周围，在附近”，“朝……四处”。
如：There are around 100 people in the hall.
大厅里大约有一百人。
She looks around the room. 她环顾一下室内。
11. School starts at nine o’clock.
九点钟学校开始上课。
start动词，表示“开始”的意思，相当于begin。
开始做某事
如：What time does the party start 聚会几点开始？
It starts to rain (raining). 开始下雨了。
He usually starts studying at eight at home.
他在家通常8点开始学习。
六. 知识点巩固
1. He is always the last one _________ to school.
A. goes B. to go C. go D. to goes
2. He _________ up at 7:00 and _________ the early morning news on TV.
A. gets, sees B. gets, watchs
C. gets, watches D. gets, to watches
3. Here are your pants. _________!
A. Put them on B. Put on them
C. Put it on D. Put on it
4. Tony usually gets up _________ 5 o’clock.
A. in B. at C. on D. about
5. Lucy, can you _________ me about your school
A. talk B. tell C. speak D. know
6. Do you want to know _________ my morning
A. about B. at C. around D. for
7. What time _________ she _________
A. do, go to bed B. does, goes to bed
C. does, go to the bed D. does, go to bed
8. Do you like _________ music
A. hear B. to hear C. to listen to D. listen to
9. —What time do you usually go to bed
—At half _________ ten.
A. at B. on C. past D. in
10. —_________ do you like dogs
—Because they are smart（聪明的）.
A. What B. What…for C. Why D. When
Keys: 1. B 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. B 6. A 7. D 8. C 9. C 10. C
【模拟试题】（答题时间：90分钟）
I. 用下列字母组成单词
1. oershw ___________ 2. bysu ___________
3. artst ___________ 4. ftera ___________
5. oetlh ___________ 6. busrh ___________
II. 用英语表达下列短语
1. 回家 ___________ 2. 上学 ___________
3. 洗澡 ___________ 4. 在大约五点钟 ___________
5. 去上班 ___________ 6. 看早间新闻 ___________
7. 做家庭作业___________ 8. 去睡觉 ___________
9. 练习弹吉他 ___________ 10. 乘坐公共汽车 ___________
III. 请画掉每句中多余的一个词，并将正确的句子写在横线上
1. What time isn’t is it
___________________________________________________
2. What time does she they usually get up
__________________________________________________
3. What when time does he play volleyball
___________________________________________________
4. We play plays basketball at eight o’clock.
___________________________________________________
5. It’s thirty one o’clock.
____________________________________________________
IV. 试着用英语表达下列时间。
1. 7:20 2. 8:30 3. 9:18 4. 10:58
5. 11:46 6. 14:40 7. 4:32 8. 5:50
9. 6:16 10. 8:50
V. 单项选择
1. He doesn’t like ___________ late.
A. be B. to C. is D. to be
2. The student has ___________ to do every day.
A. some homeworks B. a lot of homework
C. much homeworks D. many homework
3. My mother goes to work ___________.
A. by her bike B. on her bike
C. by a bike D. on bike
4. We have ___________ supper late in the evening.
A. a B. an C. one D. /
5. What time ___________ Jim ___________ games
A. does, play B. is, playing
C. do, play D. are, playing
6. Can you ___________ “window” in English
A. talk B. tell C. spell D. speak
7. People have ___________ in the middle of the day.
A. breakfast B. lunch
C. supper D. dinner
8. Chinese people like ___________ CCTV news at 7:00 pm.
A. looking B. reading
C. seeing D. watching
9. It’s six now. Lanlan ___________ up, but she often ___________ up at half past six.
A. gets, is get B. gets, is getting
C. is getting, gets D. gets, gets
10. I often do some reading, but ___________ I like to watch TV.
A. sometime B. some time
C. some times D. sometimes
11. —___________ does he want to eat
—Noodles.
A. What B. How C. Why D. When
12. She is ___________ CCTV news with her parents.
A. looking B. reading C. watching D. seeing
13. Jeff ___________ the bus to school.
A. goes B. brings C. gets D. takes
14. Tina often goes to ___________ work after ___________ breakfast.
A. the, the B. /, / C. /, the D. the, a
15. ___________ interesting movie it is!
A. What an B. What C. How D. How an
16. Please look ___________ the book and listen ___________ me.
A. at, at B. for, on C. with, at D. at, to
17. —What ___________ do you usually go to the music club
—I usually go there ___________ around 7:30.
A. day, to B. time, at C. date, in D. time, on
18. —___________？
—It’s nine o’clock.
A. What day is it B. What’s the time
C. What’s the date D. When is it
19. ___________ Lucy and Lily want to go to the park
A. Do B. Does C. Is D. Are
20. Mr. Wang goes to work early ___________ the morning.
A. in B. at C. on D. of
21. —Lucy, _________ your coat, please.
—It’s time to go to school.
A. put on B. put off
C. look after D. look like
22. What time is ___________
A. that B. this C. it D. the clock
23. Alice often takes the number 11 bus ___________ the hotel.
A. in B. to C. at D. for
24. Mike is English, ___________ he likes Beijing Opera.
A. or B. and C. also D. but
25. The students stay ___________ home ___________ Sundays.
A. at, at B. on, at C. at, on D. on, on
VI. 选择对话补全句子，有两个选项是多余的
A: Hi, Lucy! ____1____
B: Well, I live near my school, so I get up at a quarter to seven. I never go to school late.
A: Do you have breakfast at home
B: Yes, ____2____.
A: When do you go to school
B: ____3____, so I go to school at seven forty-five.
A: ____4____
B: I leave school at five past five and ____5____.
a. What time do you usually get up on weekdaysb. I usually have some cakes and a glass of milkc. Class begins at eight o’clockd. I get home at five-thirtye. When do you play gamesf. I have lunch at schoolg. When do you get home
VII. 完形填空
What do you do at the weekend Some people like to ___1___ at home, but others like to go ___2___ a walk or play football. Mr Jack works hard in factory during the ___3___. At the weekend, he always ___4___ the same thing. On Saturday he ___5___ his car and on ___6___ he goes with his family to a village by car. His uncle and aunt have a farm there. It isn’t a ___7___ one, but there is always ___8___ work to do on the farm. The children help with the animals and give them their ___9___. Jack and his wife help in the fields. At the end of the day, they are all ___10___ and Jack’s aunt gives a big meals.
1. （ ） A. work B. sit C. stay D. play
2. （ ） A. out B. for C. to D. away
3. （ ） A. day B. evening C. night D. weekdays
4. （ ） A. does B. has C. goes D. plays
5. （ ） A. sweeps B. driving C. sells D. washes
6. （ ） A. Monday B. Sunday C. Saturday D. Wednesday
7. （ ） A. small B. big C. far D. long
8. （ ） A. much B. many C. little D. few
9. （ ） A. clothes B. drinks C. food D. water
10. （ ） A. early B. late C. hungry D. full
VIII. 阅读理解，根据短文内容补全句子
Most children like watching TV. It’s very interesting. By watching TV they can see and learn a lot and know many things about their country and the world. Of course, they can also learn on the radio. But they can learn better and more easily on TV. Why Because they can hear and watch at the same time. But they can’t see anything over the radio. TV helps to open children’s eyes. TV helps to open their brains（大脑）, too. They can learn newer and better ways of doing things. They may find the world is now smaller than before. Many children watch TV on Saturday or Sunday evening. They are always busy with their lessons. But a few children watch TV every night. They go to bed very late. They can’t have a good rest. That’s too bad.
1. Children ______the programs on TV.
2. They can get to know the world by __________ TV.
3. They like TV programs __________ than radio programs.
4. They can learn more easily when they can hear and watch at the __________ time.
5. There are some teaching programs on the __________, too.
6. TV helps to __________ children’s eyes and their brains.
7. That’s the new __________ of working out the problem.
8. With TVs and radios around us, the world is getting __________.
9. Children can’t watch TV for too long because they are always __________ with their lessons.
10. It is __________ for children to watch TV every night.
IX. 单词拼写
A）根据句意及首字母提示补全单词。
1. Liu Xiang is a r________ star.
2. I usually eat b________ at seven in the m________.
3. Weiwei g________ to school at eight o’clock.
4. My mother is very b________ today. She can’t come to see me.
5. We make a s________ schedule.
6. My brother likes to sleep a little l________ in the morning.
7. What t________ do you u________ go to school
8. She wants to j________ the chess club.
9. My f________ color is red.
10. Can you p________ the violin
B）根据句意，用括号内所给词的正确形式填空。
1. Uncle John likes ________ (make) things.
2. We can ________ (swim) now.
3. Why am I the last one B ________ I am the ________ (old).
4. Rich has two ________ (brother).
5. My brother can take a ________ (show).
X. 根据图示写出Zhao Ming的一日活动。要求每图写一个句子。
1._____________ 2. _____________ 3. _____________
4. _____________ 5. _____________ 6. ____________
7. ______________ 8. _____________
【试题答案】
I 1. shower 2. busy 3.start 4.after 5.hotel 6.brush
II. 1. go home 2. go to school 3. take a shower 4. at around 5 o’clock
5. go to work 6. watch the early morning news 7. do homework
8. go to sleep 9. practice guitar 10. take the bus
III. 1. What time is it
2. What time does she usually get up
3. What time does he play volleyball
4. We play basketball at eight o’clock.
5. It’s one o’clock.
IV. 1. seven-twenty / twenty past seven 2. eight-thirty / half past eight
3. nine-eighteen / eighteen past nine 4. two to eleven
5. fourteen to twelve 6. twenty to fifteen 7. four thirty-two
8. ten to six 9. six-sixteen / sixteen past six 10. ten to nine
V. 1. D 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. A 6. D 7. B 8. D 9. C 10. D
11. A 12. C 13. D 14. B 15. A 16. A 17. B 18. B 19. A 20. A
21. A 22. C 23. B 24. D 25. C
VI. 1. a 2. b 3. c 4. g 5. d
VII. 1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A 5.D 6. B 7. B 8. A 9. C 10. C
VIII. 1. like 2. watching, morning 3. better 4. same 5. radio
6. open 7. way 8. smaller 9. busy 10. bad
IX. A) 1. running 2. breakfast 3. goes 4. busy 5. shower
6. late 7. time, usually 8. join 9. favorite 10. play
B) 1. making 2. swim 3. Because, oldest 4. brothers 5. shower
X. 参考例句：
1. Zhao Ming gets up at six o’clock in the morning.
2. He eats breakfast at six-thirty.
3. He goes to school at seven.
4. He begins classes at seven-fifty.
5. He plays basketball at four in the afternoon.
6. He takes a shower at five-o’clock.
7. He plays the guitar at five-thirty.
8. He eats dinner/supper at seven-thirty in the evening.
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 1 页 共 12 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
Unit 5 Do you have a soccer ball
（一）语言目标（Language Goals）：
1. Ask and answer questions about ownership.
2. Make suggestions.
（二）语言结构：
1. 动词have的一般现在时。
2. Let引导的祈使句。
（三）重点单词：
soccer, ball, tennis, racket, ping-pong, volleyball, basketball, bat, sport, have, does, let, us, play, well, sound, good, we, many, club, more, class, interesting, boring, fun, difficult, relaxing, watch, has, collection, but, only every, day
（四）重点短语：
soccer ball, tennis racket, ping-pong bat, doesn’t = does not, play sports, a great sports collection, watch TV, every day, sports club, play computer games, play soccer ball, play ping-pong, play basketball
（五）必背句型：
Do you have a ping-pong ball Yes, I do. No, I don’t.
Does she / he have a soccer ball Yes, she / he does. No, she / he doesn’t.
Let’s play soccer. That sounds good.
Ed Smith has a great sports collection. He has 5 volleyballs.
She plays sport every day.
（六）口语交际：
talk about ownership
I have ... She / He has ...
Do you have ... Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.
Does she / he have ... Yes, she / he does. / No, she / he doesn’t.
make suggestions
Let’s watch TV / play ping-pong / ...
That sounds good / great / interesting /...
（七）疑难解析（Key Points）：
1. 怎样表达某人有某物：
※当你从地上拾到一支钢笔，你会情不自禁地问Whose pen is it 这是谁的钢笔？Is it hers 是她的吗？前两个单元我们学了用物主代词表示所属关系，本单元我们将学会用have表示所属关系，have“有”，强调拥有或占有，是所属关系。如：
I have a father. I have a mother.
我有爸爸。我有妈妈。
I have a family.
我有一个家。
谓语动词have在句中有两种形式，即have和has。have用于第一人称的单数和复数（I、we），第二人称（you）和第三人称复数（they或其他复数名词等），has用于第三人称单数he, she, it或单数名词。
I / We have a computer.
我/我们有台电脑。
You have a computer.
你/你们有电脑。
They / Jim and Tom have a computer.
他们/吉姆和汤姆有台电脑。
Kate / She has a computer.
凯特/她有电脑。
2. 动词have（有）的一般现在时：
（1）have是及物动词（vt.），后面接宾语，意为“有、拥有”。用于肯定句时，如果主语是第三人称单数，have要变为has。变为一般疑问句时，要在句首加助动词do或does（主语第三人称单数时为does），加does后动词还原，即用动词have。如：
I have a brother.
我有一个哥哥。
She has a story book.
她有一本故事书。
（2）have的否定句，要在主语后，实义动词前加助动词don’t或doesn’t。主语为第三人称单数需要加does，加does后动词还原。如：
I have a racket.
我有一个网球球拍。
I don’t have a racket.
我没有网球球拍。
He has a computer.
他有一台电脑。
He doesn’t have a computer.
他没有电脑。
3. there be与have的区别：
它们都表示“有”的意思，但句型There is/ are ...表示某处有某物或某人，强调的是一种客观存在；但是have强调的是拥有或占有，主语一般是名词或代词，与主语是所属关系。
I have two brothers and one sister.
我有两个兄弟，一个姐姐。
My sister has two toys but I have one.
我妹妹有两个玩具，而我只有一个。
※有时There be结构和have可替换。
There are twenty classes in our school. = We have twenty classes in our school.
我们学校有二十个班级。
例：看图，用方框中的词完成对话。
There’s, have, has, four, play, watch, bedrooms, There’re
Look! We (1) a big red house. The house has three bed-rooms（卧房）. It (2) a nice window（窗户）. This house (3) two floors（两层）. (4) a TV in the sitting room（客厅）。 (5) two bathrooms （浴室）in this house. There’s a table and (6) chairs in this house. The diningroom（餐厅）is very big. A big bird is in the bathroom. We (7) TV in the sitting room. We have（吃）breakfast, lunch and supper in the diningroom. We sleep（睡）in the (8) . We wash faces（洗脸）and have a shower（洗澡）in the bathroom. The house (9) a garden（花园）, too. We (10) badminton in it. We love our house.
【解析】此题主要考查英语中“有”的用法，there be表示某处有什么。have (has)表示某人有某物，另外，本题出现了三个动词短语：play badminton打羽毛球，watch TV看电视，have breakfast / lunch / supper吃早/中/晚饭。
由上栏讲解及上下文的意思可知答案为：
(1) have (2)has (3)has (4) There’s (5) There’re
(6) four (7) watch (8)bedrooms (9)has (10) play
注：There’s = There is There’re = There are
4. Let’s play baseball.
我们打棒球吧。
这是一个以动词Let开头的祈使句，表示建议。祈使句都是以动词开头，省略了主语。Let’s是Let us的缩写形式，us意为“我们”，放在动词let后作宾语，它被称为代词宾格。该句型结构为let sb. do sth.“让某人做某事”，表示说话人的建议。对该祈使句所表示的建议肯定回答一般用OK. / All right. / Yes, let’s ...，否定回答一般用Sorry, I ...等回答。如：
5. 祈使句
祈使句是英语的基本句型之一，表达说话人对对方的叮嘱、劝告、请求或命令等，往往有表示请求、命令、希望、禁止、劝告等意思。
※祈使句的肯定句式有三种形式：
（1）Do型（行为动词原形+副词），如：
Sit down! 坐下！
Stand up! 起立！
（2）Be型（连系动词be+表语，如形容词、名词等），如：
Be quiet! 安静！
（3）let型（let+人称代词的宾格+动词原形+其他成份）。如：
Let me help you.
让我来帮助你。
Let us play basketball.
让我们打篮球吧。
※Do型是最常见、最简单的一种结构。Let型是本单元的重点。
（4）否定句式很简单，“Don’t”开头记心间。
※祈使句的肯定结构是以动词原形打头，否定结构是以“Don’t+动词原形”开头。如：
Don’t go there, please.
请别去那儿。
Don’t be late.
不要迟到。
Don’t let him in.
不要让他进来。
※let型祈使句分为两种情形，含第一人称和第三人称两种。
→含第三人称的祈使句的否定句在句首加Don’t，构成否定句。
Don’t let him / her/ it/ them in.
别让他（她）（它）们进来。
→含第一人称主语（us, me）的祈使句的否定，否定式不是在句首加Don’t，而是这样构成：
Let’s (us, me) + not +动词原形……
如：Let’s not sit here.
我们不要坐在这儿。
例：根据题意或图示完成句子。
（1）A: Have some tea, please.
B: _________ you.
（2）_________ open the window.
（3）_________ fight（打架）, Tom and Billy.
（4）Let’s _________ ________ TV. It’s boring. _______ dance.
（5）________ let the boy run in the street. It’s dangerous.（危险）
Keys:
（1）Thank （2）Don’t （3）Don’t
（4）not, watch, Let’s （5）Don’t
6. 人称代词（小结）：
表示“我”、“你”、“他”、“她”、“我们”、“你们”、“他们”的词，叫人称代词。人称代词有人称、数和格的变化，见下表：
人称代词（Personal Pronouns）
※人称代词的一般用法：
→作主语（用主格）
I like basketball.
我喜欢打篮球。
注：I（我）无论放在句首、句中或句尾都要大写。
He is a reporter.
他是个记者。
→作表格（用主格，口语中常用宾格）
Who is there It’s me (I).
是谁啊？是我。
→Let us go home.
让我们回家吧。（us作动词let的宾语）
Tom is with us.
汤姆和我们在一块。（us作介词with的宾语）
7. That sounds interesting.
那听上去很有趣。
在口语中，当你的朋友提出一些尚未实施的建议时，你做出针对该建议的个人观点时，用句型That sounds + 形容词。
形容词的选用可根据个人观点。
褒义的评价可选用：interesting, fun, relaxing, good, wonderful.
贬义的评价可选用：boring, terrible, bad.
如：Let’s watch TV. That sounds bad.
that指前一个所提的建议，英语中指前面所述的内容或事情，通常用that而不是this。that属第三人称单数，谓语动词sound后应加s。sound在这里是连系动词，作“听起来……”讲，后面跟一个形容词作表语，如：
Your idea doesn’t sound good.
你的主意听起来好像不行。
类似sound一样的连系动词有：look（看起来……，显得……），taste（尝起来……），smell（闻起来……）。如：
The song sounds beautiful.
这首歌听起来很优美。
That story sounds very interesting.
这个故事听起来很有趣。
Your watch looks very nice.
你的手表很好看。
类似的表达法，look happy看上去很高兴，sound like听起来像，look like看起来像。
8. We have many sports clubs: basketball, ping-pong, soccer.
many指代或修饰可数名词复数，much指代或修饰不可数名词，many和much的比较级都是more，此处more是many的比较级。如：
There are many balls on the floor.
地板上有很多球。
There is much milk in the bottle.
瓶里有很多牛奶。
I have many picture books and he has more.
我有很多图书，他的图书更多。
9. interesting 有趣的
interesting是形容词，表示某事物是令人感兴趣的、有趣的。
interested则表示人对事物感兴趣，后面常用in的介词短语。
如：This game is very interesting.
这活动十分有趣。
I’m interested in sports.
我对体育很感兴趣。
10. But he doesn’t play sports —he only watches them on TV.
他不进行体育活动——他只是在电视上观看体育节目。
（1）play sports意思是“进行体育活动”。
play作及物动词，可表示“打球、踢球”或“弹奏乐器”。
play作不及物动词，表示“玩、玩耍”之意。
play with表示“玩某东西”。
如：Do you like playing football
你喜欢踢足球吗？
They play on the playground.
他们常在操场上玩。
Don’t play with the alarm clock.
别玩闹钟。
相关词组：
※play baseball 打棒球
动词play后面可接表示球类的名词，表示“打球”或“踢球”。这些球类名词前不能加任何冠词。可以说play football（踢足球），不能说play a （或the） football。再如：
play basketball 打篮球
play volleyball 打排球
play football /soccer ball 踢足球
play tennis 打网球
play table tennis (ping-pong) 打乒乓球
play badminton 打羽毛球
play还可以和其他的词搭配成短语。如：
play computer games 玩电脑游戏
play sports 进行体育运动
词汇链：player 运动员 playmate 游戏伙伴、玩伴
※watch的用法，watch作名词时，是“手表”，其复数为watches。watch作动词讲，意思是“观看、注视”，在英语中看电视和看比赛不用see，而用watch（第三人称单数为watches）。
watch sports on TV 在电视上看体育比赛
watch the football game 看足球比赛
watch TV 看电视
※join: 参加、加入（某个组织、团体）
join the WTO 加入世贸组织
join the Party 入党
join the baseball club 加入棒球俱乐部
Please join us. 一块参加我们的活动吧。
11. and、but和or的用法：
这两个词都是并列连词，用来连接并列关系的词组或分句，其用法如下：
※and意为“和”，多用在肯定句中列举事物，通常只在最后一个事物前用这个词。如：
You, he and I are students.
你，我，他都是学生。
※or意为“或者”，多用于选择疑问句中。如：
Is your coat big or small
你的上衣大还是小？
※在否定句中，表示并列部分的连词应单独使用or，若用and必须重复前面的否定句。如：
There’s no air or (=and no) water on the moon.
月球上没有空气和水。
※but是表转折关系的连词。如：
You’re a teacher, but I’m a student.
你是老师，而我是学生。
12. welcome的用法（You’re welcome.）
Welcome to our sports center.
欢迎到我们的运动中心。
※welcome在这里是感叹词，意思是“欢迎”。welcome to...欢迎到某个地方来。如：
Welcome to China.
欢迎您到中国来！
※welcome还可用作形容词，意思是“受欢迎的”。如：
You are a welcome guest.
你是受欢迎的客人。
※welcome作表语，You’re welcome.的意思是“不用谢”，回答对方道谢时的常用语。如：
Thank you very much.非常感谢你。
You’re welcome.不用谢（不客气）。
【模拟试题】（答题时间：90分钟）
一. 按要求变换词形。
（1）they（宾格）_________ （2）does not（缩写形式）_________
（3）have（第三人称单数）_________ （4）Let’s（完全形式）_________
（5）our（人称代词主格）_________ （6）relax（形容词）_________
（7）soccer（同义词）_________
二. 单项选择
1. —Well, Let’s play computer games.
—That ________ good.
A. are B. sounds C. sound D. am
2. There are five people in a ______ team.
A. baseball B. basketball C. tennis D. volleyball
3. The school play（校园剧）is very _________. So we like it.
A. boring B. interest C. interesting D. difficult
4. _________ you have a baseball bat
A. Do B. Does C. Are D. Is
5. She _________ an English-Chinese dictionary.
A. is B. has C. have D. are
6. Let him _________ TV.
A. watches B. look at C. see D. watch
7. She _________ sports every day. Her mother _________ TV every day.
A. plaies; watches B. plays; watchs
C. plays; watches D. play; watch
8. Let’s _________ to play _________ football.
A. / ; / B. go; / C. go; the D. /; the
9. —Do you have a color TV set
— ________.
A. Yes, we have. B. No, we haven’t.
C. Yes, we do. D. Yes, we are.
10. —Let’s watch TV.
—No, please. That sounds _________.
A. boring B. broing C. interesting D. good
11. We need one ping-pong ball and two _________.
A. ping-pong bat B. ping-pongs bat
C. ping-pong bats D. ping-pongs bats
12. My mother likes volleyball. She thinks it is _________.
A. fun B. difficult C. boring D. health
13. —_________ he _________ any baseballs
— Yes, he has one.
A. Does; have B. Does; has
C. Do; have D. Do; has
14. _________ Harry and Mike like computer games
A. Are B. Do C. Does D. B或C都可以
15. My father has a small _________ collection.
A. sport B. sport’s C. sports’ D. sports
16. I like to watch football games _________ TV.
A. on B. at C. in D. from
17. He _________ baseball.
A. don’t play B. doesn’t play
C. doesn’t plays D. play
18. —Does John play tennis
—No, _________.
A. he does B. he don’t
C. he doesn’t like D. he doesn’t
19. —Let’s play computer game.
—That _________ good.
A. is sound B. sound
C. sounds D. is sounds
20. Mona _________ four books and two pencils.
A. have B. is have
C. is has D. has
三. 用助动词和情态动词do, does, don’t, doesn’t, is, am, are, be, can, can’t填空
1. —Does he have a baseball
—Yes, he _________.
2. _________ they need school things
3. She _________ have sports things.
4. I _________ know her name.
Sorry, I _________ play volleyball. It’s too difficult.
5. Let’s _________ good friends.
6. _________ you help me, please
7. I _________ a soccer fan. I like playing soccer very much.
8. _________ there many clubs in your school
9. There _________ a computer on my desk.
四. 用所给动词正确形式填空
sound have like play bring be look watch join talk
1. She _________ sports every day.
2. My friend _________ sports very much.
3. Can you _________ your new dictionary here
4. It _________ boring.
5. Let’s _________ them on TV.
6. _________ at the board. There’s a notice.
7. Let’s _________ about the picture.
8. _________ there a nice picture on the wall.
9. Does your brother _________ the volleyball club
10. We _________ twenty classes in our school.
五. 补全对话：
A: Let’s play 1 OK
B: Sorry, I don’t have volleyball. 2 I have a basketball.
A: I 3 want to play basketball. I only want to play volleyball.
B: Who 4 a volleyball Do you know
A: Maybe Tom has one. Let’ go and ask him.
A&B: Hi, Tom! 5 you have a volleyball
C: No, I 6 . 7 Peter have one
A&B: Oh, yes, he 8 .
A&B&C: Hi, Peter! Do you have a volleyball
D: Yes, I do. But it is at home.
A&B&C: 9 to hear that!
B: Well, let’s play basketball. OK
A&C: OK!
A&B&C: Peter, please 10 us.
D: OK! Let’s play!
六. 句型转换：
1. I have some paper.（变为一般疑问句）
_______________________________________________________________
2. We have many flowers.（变为否定句）
_______________________________________________________________.
3. My brother has a computer game.（变为一般疑问句）
_______________________________________________________________
4. She has some good friends.（变为否定句）
_______________________________________________________________
5. There are many pictures in his room.（变一般疑问句）
_______________________________________________________________
七. 根据下面表格补全问句或答语：
1. Q: Does Jim like basketball
A: ____________________________________.
2. Q: What does Tom like playing
A: ____________________________________.
3. Q: ____________________________________
A: No, he doesn’t. But he likes volleyball.
4. Q: ____________________________________
A: They like basketball.
5. Q: ____________________________________
A: No, they don’t.
八. 阅读短文，回答问题：
Jim, Kate and Mingming are doing their homework. Jim’s spelling of “Monday” is wrong. Kate tells him about it. Mingming doesn’t have her eraser in her pencil case. She wants to borrow one from Jim or Kate. Jim says he has one and gives it to Mingming. Mingming thanks Jim for help. Jim says, “You’re welcome.” Now Jim says, “Thanks a lot.” to Kate for her help. “Not at all,” says Kate. The three children are students in Class 3, Grade 1 of No. 11 Middle School in Beijing. Jim is from the UK. Kate is from the USA. Mingming is a Chinese girl. The three students are good friends. They often do homework together and play together.
1. Does Mingming have an eraser
________________________________________________________.
2. Who has an eraser
________________________________________________________.
3. Where do they study
________________________________________________________.
4. Where is Kate from
________________________________________________________.
5. What do they often do together
________________________________________________________.
九. 完形填空:
There is 1 old man in New York. He 2 children at all. 3 he likes cats very much. He has black cats and white cats. He has 4 cats and baby cats. So children 5 come to his house. They come to play 6 the cats. More and more cats come to the old man’s house. Soon 7 are too many cats. The old man can’t give them much food. So he has an idea. “The children 8 my cats,” he thinks. So he 9 each child a cat. Then he is happy. The children are happy, 10 the cats are happy, too. Because they each have a home.
( )1. A. an B. a C. the D. /
( )2. isn’t like B. don’t like
C. not like D. doesn’t like
( )3. A. So B. But C. Then D. And
( )4. A. mother B. mothers C. mother’s D. a mother
( )5. A. like to B. too C. can D. could
( )6. A. at B. of C. with D. in
( )7. A. they B. there C. these D. the children
( )8. A. play B. love C. put D. take
( )9. A. brings B. gives C. takes D. carries
( )10. A. so B. or C. and D. but
十. 阅读理解：
Beckham in a Football Movie
Do you like football You must know David Beckham. But do you know that he will be in a movie He will be David Beckham in the movie Goal.
Beckham said, “I want to teach kids how to play football when I finally hang up my boots.” “I believe that Goal will send a positive message to kids around the world.”
Beckham, 29, said, “I think that Goal will make football more popular in America and Asia. I am very happy because I can help do it,” he said.
( )1. What is the Goal
A. A book. B. A person. C. A name. D. A movie.
( )2. What’s the meaning of “hang up my boots”
A. 不再踢球 B. 再踢球 C. 挂起靴子 D.绞死
( )3. How old is Beckham
A. The story doesn’t tell us.
B. Twenty-nine.
C. Twenty-two.
D. He is not old.
( )4. What’s Beckham’s firstname
A. David. B. Beckham. C. Goal. D. We don’t know.
( )5. What’s the meaning of the underlined word “positive” in the passage
A. 积极的 B. 负面的 C. 普通的 D. 吃惊的
Basketball is still a young game. It is just more than a hundred years old. In the winter of 1891, a certain college(大学) in America was having trouble(麻烦) with its boy students. The weather was so bad that the students must stay indoors(在室内). Since they could not enjoy(享受) their sports outside, they were unhappy, and some of them even got into fights(争斗).
Finally one of the teachers at the college, J.E. Naismith, was asked to invent(发明) a new game for the students. It was not an easy job because such a game had to be played indoors, and the court(球场) was not very large.
Naismith thought for a few days and invented a kind of ball game. It was a fast, exciting game with much moving and passing. It was played between two teams. To make a score, the ball had to be thrown into a basket ten feet(英尺) high above the floor on the wall. At each end of the court there was a basket. At first, Naismith had planned to have the ball thrown into a box. As he could not find boxes of the right size, he had to use fruit baskets instead. That is how the game got its name.
( )6. How old is the basketball game
A. 1891.
B. A hundred years old.
C. More than a hundred years old.
D. We don’t know.
( )7. Why must the students stay indoors in the winter of 1891
A. Because they could not enjoy their sports outside.
B. Because they were unhappy.
C. Because they wanted to play basketball.
D. Because the weather was so bad.
( )8. Who invented basketball
A. J.E. Naismith.
B. A teacher in America.
C. A man.
D. A, B, C are all right.
( )9. How came the name of basketball(篮球这个名字怎么来的)
A. Naismith named (取名)it.
B. The students named it.
C. The ball had to be thrown into a basket on the wall.
D. We don’t know.
( )10. What’s the meaning of the underlined word “court” in third paragraph(第三段)
A. 法院 B. 球场 C. 教室 D. 院子
【试题答案】
一、1. them 2. doesn’t 3. has 4. Let us 5. we 6. relaxed/relaxing 7.football
二、1. B 2. B 3. C 4. A 5. B 6. D 7. C 8. B 9. C 10. A
11. C 12. A 13. A 14. B 15. D 16. A 17. B 18.D 19.C 20. D
三、1. does 2. Do 3. doesn’t 4. don’t, can’t 5. be 6. Can 7. am 8. Are 9. is
四、1. plays 2. likes 3. bring 4. sounds 5. watch 6. Look 7. talk 8. Is 9. join 10. have
五、1. volleyball 2. But 3. don’t 4. has 5. Do 6. don’t 7. Does 8. has 9. Sorry 10. join
六、1. Do you have any paper
2. We don’t have many flowers.
3. Does your brother have a computer game
4. She doesn’t have any good friends.
5. Are there many pictures in his room
七、1. Yes, he does.
2. He likes playing volleyball.
3. Does Tom like playing basketball
4. What do Lucy and Lily like playing
5. Do Lucy and Lily like playing volleyball
八、1. No, she doesn’t.
2. Jim has an eraser.
3. They study in Class 3, Grade 1 of No 11 Middle School in Beijing.
4. She is from the USA.
5. They often do homework and play together.
九、1. A 2. D 3. B 4. A 5. A 6. C 7. B 8. B 9. B 10.C
十、1. D 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. A 6. C 7. D 8. A 9. C 10. B
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 2 页 共 15 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
Unit 2 Is this your pencil
一.教学内容：
Unit 2 Is this your pencil
二. Language Goals（语言目标）
1. 掌握常见学习用品的名称
2. 辨认物品的归谁所有。Identify ownership.
三. Strictures（结构）
1. 指示代词this、that
2. 一般疑问句及其简略回答
四. Target language（目标语言）
1. Is this your pencil Yes, it is. / No, it isn’t.
2. Is that his book Yes, it is. / No, it isn’t.
3. What’s this in English It’s a eraser.
4. How do you spell pencil
五. Key points（难点分析）
1. —Is this your pencil 这是你的铅笔吗？
—Yes, it is. 是的。
这个句子的is怎么放到了句子的开头？朗读起来有什么要注意的吗？
Is this……？这个顺序构成了一般疑问句。英语句子如果是is, am, are作谓语，那么把它们移到句子的开头，将第一个字母大写就构成了一般疑问句。回答一般疑问句时，答案是肯定的就说yes，答案是否定的就用no。
还有值得注意的是：答句中要用it代替原来的this或that。例如：
—What’s this 这是什么？
—It’s a pencil. 这是铅笔。
看到了吧，答语没有使用this is。
一般疑问句在朗读的时候用升调，语调在最后一个单词或短语上体现。
2. —Is that your backpack
那是你的背包吗？
—No, it isn’t. It’s his backpack.
不是。是他的。
this, that和it都可以指代单数名词，它们的区别是什么？
this和that都是指示代词，this意为“这”“这个”，that意为“那”“那个”；it是人称代词，意为“它”。
（1）this一般用来指时间或空间上较近的人或物；that常用来指时间或空间上较远的人或物；it则没有远近之分。试比较：
This is a pen. 这是一枝钢笔。（近指）
That is a book. 那是一本书。（远指）
It is a ruler. 它是一把尺子。
（2）介绍某人时可以用this，也可以用that，一般不用it。如：
This is Tom. That is Li Wei.
这位是汤姆，那位是李伟。
（3）放在一起的两样东西，先说this，后说that。如：
This is a pen. That is a pencil.
这是一支钢笔，那是一支铅笔。
（4）向别人介绍某人时说This is …，不说That is…。如：
This is Helen. Helen, this is Tom.
这是海伦。海伦，这是汤姆。
（5）This is不能缩写，而That is 可以缩写。如：
This is a bike. That’s a car.
这是一辆自行车，那是一辆轿车。
（6）在回答this或that作主语的疑问句时，要用it代替this或that。如：
—Is this a notebook 这是笔记本吗？
—Yes, it is. 是的，它的。
—What’s that 那是什么？
—It’s a kite. 是只风筝。
（7）it可以指天气、时间、距离或人，也常用来代替前文中所提到的东西。如：
It’s a fine day today. 今天是个好天。
What’s the time It’s six. 几点了？六点。
It’s not far from here. 离这儿不远。
—Who is it 谁呀？
—It’s me. 是我。
This is a pen. It’s Lily’s。
这是一枝钢笔。它是莉莉的。
例：选择填空。
（1）—What’s that in English
—____________________ a pencil case.
A. This is B. That’s
C. He is D. It’s
（2）—Is this a watch
—__________________.
A. Yes, this is B. No, it is
C. Yes, it isn’t D. No, it isn’t
解析：（1）本题考查what开头的特殊疑问句，用以询问“那个用英语怎么说？”，无论问句中是this还是that，在回答时都用it来代替。it is可以缩写成it’s。
故答案为D。
（2）该小题考查的是一般疑问句的答语。首先，一般疑问句的答语必须要有Yes或No，Yes表示肯定的答复，No表示否定的答复；其次，Yes或No后面的部分必须要与Yes或No保持一致，即：Yes后必须是肯定的，No后必须是否定的；另外，问句中的this和that在答语中要用it来代替。
故答案为D。
3. How do you spell pen
钢笔这个单词怎样拼写？
（1）how表示“怎么，如何”的意思，疑问词，引导特殊疑问句。
（2）do是助动词，无实际意义，帮助行为动词构成疑问句否定句。当主语是第三人称单数时，助动词应为does。如：
How do you know the news？
你是怎样知道这个消息的呢？
对特殊疑问句的回答不能用yes或no来回答，而应该根据实际情况将需要拼写的单词按照字母顺序依次拼出，如果同一个字母连续出现两次时，则在它前面加double，意为“双写”。如果不知道怎么拼写，通常用I am sorry. I don’t know. 来回答。例如：
—How do you spell“good”？你怎么拼写“good”这个词？
—G—double O—D. G，双写O，再加D。
—How do you spell this word
你怎么拼写这个单词？
—I am sorry, I don’t know.
对不起，我不知道。
4. How……？的一些社交上的用法
how是一个表示“如何”的疑问词，可以用来引导一些社交场合的套语。
△用于询问健康状况或一般生活情况
How are you 你好吗？
How is Helen today
海伦今天好吗？
△How do you do （你好吗？）是正式介绍中的一句套话。从不用来询问健康。
—How do you do 你好！
—How do you do 你好！
△how经常用在询问目前状况的疑问句里，如：
How’s life 生活如何？
How are things 情况怎样？
How’s work 工作怎样？
例：句子配对。
（1）How is your mother today
（2）How do you do
（3）How do you spell it
（4）How old is your brother
（5）How do you go to school
（你怎样上学？）
（6）How are things
A. Very good.
B. By bus（乘公汽）。
C. R—O—S—E。
D. She’s fine. Thank you.
E. He’s ten.
F. How do you do
5. 如何根据疑问的形式来理解疑问句？有疑问的句子称为疑问句。
如何根据疑问形式来理解问句？
（1）句首出现疑问词what, where, how, how old, who等等的问句属于特殊疑问句。这种问句可以直接作答。例如：
What is this It is a cake.
这是什么？这是蛋糕。
Where is our teacher He is in the classroom.
我们的老师在哪儿？他在教室里。
Who is the girl She is Han Meimei.
这女孩是谁？她就是韩梅梅。
How old are you I am twelve.
你多大年龄？我十二岁。
（2）以be（am / is / are）系动词，can 情态动词，或do / does助动词开头的问句属于一般疑问句，其应答常用Yes表示肯定，No表示否定。例如：
Is this a bike Yes, it is.
这是一辆自行车吗？是的。
Are you English No, I’m not.
你是英国人吗？不是。
Am I right Yes, you are.
我是正确的吗？是的。
Can you spell it Sorry, I can’t.
你能拼读它吗？对不起，我不能。
Do you know the new student Yes, I do.
你认识新来的这位同学吗？我认识。
6. Is this your watch Call John at 495 - 3539.
这是你的手表吗？拨打495-3539找约翰。
［用法］call sb. 给某人打电话
call sb. at + telephone number
call telephone number
（1）call动词，表示“打电话”的意思。
（2）at介词，常用来表位置、地点。
如：Please call me if you wish.
如果你愿意，请打电话给我。
Please call 110 if you have any trouble.
如果你遇到麻烦，请拨打110。
（3）打电话还可以表示为：
7. in和at都可以用作介词，表示时间或地点。
（1）两者都可以表示时间：
a. in表示时间时，指一段时间，如：年、月、季节。另外有三个固定词组：in the morning上午；in the afternoon下午；in the evening晚上。例如：
I have classes in the evening.
我晚上上课。
b. at表示时间时，指时间点或表示较短的时期。例如：
He gets up at six every morning.
他每天早上六点起床。
（2）它们还可以表示地点：
a. in表示地点时，指在某平面或空间里。例如：
There is a hole in the wall.
墙上有个洞。
There are some students in the classroom.
教室里有一些学生。
b. at表示地点时，指空间位置的一点，常指较小的地方，如城镇、村庄、车站、工厂、学校等。例如：
He is at the gate of our school.
他在我们学校大门口。
8. please call Mary. Phone # 235 - 0285.
请打电话给玛丽，2350285。
please的用法：
△please是礼貌用语，表示请求或邀请别人做某事的情景，如Sit down, please（或Please sit down.）请坐，英语中这样的句子叫做祈使句，在祈使句中please可以放在句前，也可放在句末，用逗号隔开。
9. A set of keys一串钥匙。
a set of表示“一串、一套、一列”等意思。如：
a set of books一套书
a set of six dining chairs六把一套的餐椅
a new set of rules一套新的规则
10. isn’t是is not的缩写。但是两个否定词no和not有什么区别呢？
答：no和not都有“不，不是”的意思，但它们在用法上确实有所不同。
（1）no可以用作副词，单独使用，主要用于对一般疑问句作简略的否定回答的开头，其反义词是yes。例如：
—Is this your backpack
这是你的背包吗？
—No, it isn’t.
不，它不是。
no还可以用作形容词修饰名词，既可以修饰可数名词，又可以修饰不可数名词。修饰单数可数名词时，no相当于not a；修饰复数可数名词或不可数名词时，no相当于not any。例如：
I have no pen. = I have not a pen.
我没有钢笔。
There are no books in the bag. = There are not any books in the bag.
书包里没有书。
（2）not用作副词时，不能单独使用，要放在be动词（is, am, are）或情态动词（如can）后面，用来构成否定句。例如：
This isn’t my ruler.
这不是我的尺子。
I am not Tom.
我不是汤姆。
注意：is not可以缩写为isn’t, are not可以缩写为aren’t，但am not一般不能缩写。
11. lost and found失物招领
［用法］
（1）lost（形容词adj.）：丢失的，遗失的；寻物启事用lost。
（2）found：被找回的，被发生的；
招领启事用found。
（3）lost and found可用作一个形容词
［举例］that lost key那把丢失的钥匙
Your bike is found.
你的自行车找到了。
In the lost and found case
在失物招领箱中
12. look for与find
［用法］动词短语，意为“寻找”。
［区别］look for意思是“寻找”，强调“找”的动作；find是及物动词，意思是“找到，发现”，强调结果，后面跟宾语。
［举例］I can’t find my pencil case. 我找不到我的铅笔盒了。
Please look for it in your bag. I think you can find it there.
请在你的书包里找一找，我想你能找到它的。
13. Excuse me.
［中文意思］“劳驾”“请问”“对不起”。
［用法］用于向别人提出请求，询问事情或打扰别人。
［警示］Sorry或I’m sorry. “对不起”。由于自己的过失给对方造成影响，或对别人的要求不能满足时，可以说Sorry。
［举例］
Excuse me, can you spell your name
对不起，你能拼读你的名字吗？
Sorry, I’m late.
对不起，我迟到了。
【模拟试题】（答题时间：90分钟）
I. 将问句与答语正确搭配起来（5分）
（ ）1. What’s your phone number
（ ）2. Is this your notebook
（ ）3. How do you spell“English”
（ ）4. What’s this in English
（ ）5. Is this a TV game in English
A. No, it’s his notebook.
B. No, it’s a computer game.
C. It’s E-N-G-L-I-S-H.
D. It’s 668789.
E. It’s a notebook.
II. 用am, is或are填空（10分）
1. She ___________ a teacher. Her name __________ Wang Li.
2. I _____________ a boy. My name ___________ Li Ming.
3. —Who ____________ this girl
—She _______________ Li Mei.
4. —How old _____________ you
—I _____________ eleven.
5. —What __________________ this
—It ______________ a bird.
6. —What ______________ its name
—Its name ______________ Polly.
7. I _______________ in Row Four. I ____________ a girl.
8. David _____________ a boy. He _____________ twelve.
9. It ______________ a cat. It _____________ five.
10. You ____________ a teacher. He ____________a teacher, too.
III. 根据图画和句意填单词。（20分）
1. —What’s this in ______________
—It’s a _________________.
—How can you ______________ it
—B-A-C-K-P-A-C-K.
2. I like watching ____________ games.
3. I don’t know the word. I need an English d .
4. Please write them down in you n .
5. A __________ can tell（告诉）us the time（时间）.
6. —Is this your _________ _________
—Yes, it is. Thank you.
7. This is the __________ to the door（门）. Let’s go in.
IV. 选择填空。（15分）
1. This is ______________ key and that is ___________ eraser.
A. a, a B. a, an
C. an, a D. the, an
2. —Is that a baseball
—_________________
A. Yes, that is. B. No, it isn’t.
C. Yes, it’s. D. It’s a baseball.
3. —Hello! Are you Sue
—_____________________
A. Yes, I’m. B. No, I’m.
C. Yes, it is. D. No, I’m not.
4. —Is this her pen
—_____________________
A. No, it’s my pen.
B. No, it’s a pen.
C. Yes, it’s my pen.
D. Yes, it isn’t.
5. What’s that ______________ Chinese
A. with B. of C. to D. in
6. This is not _________ watch. I think it’s _____________ watch.
A. you, he B. she, my
C. his, her D. me, his
7. It is _______________.
A. pen B. my a pen
C. a my pen D. my pen
8. Is this ____________ English car
A. you B. I C. your D. a
9. —What’s this in English
—______________ a pencil case.
A. This’s B. This is
C. Its D. It’s
10. —Your ring is nice.
—_____________________.
A. Thank you B. OK
C. Sorry D. It’s not nice
11. —What’s that
—It’s ____________ ID card.
A. my a B. an C. the D. a
12. Is that your pencil ________ the lost and found case
A. in B. at C. on D. of
13. Please call Mike _________ 235-0285.
A. for B. at C. to D. in
14. A set of __________ on the table.
A. key is B. keys is
C. keys are D. key are
15. There is ____________“R”in“red”.
A. a B. an C. the D. /
16. —Is this her baseball
—_________________.
A. Yes, it isn’t B. No, it is
C. Yes, it is D. No, she isn’t
17. This is ___________ eraser and that’s ____________ gold ring.
A. a, an B. an, an
C. an, a D. a, a
18. —_______________ this
—_____________ a computer.
A. What’s, This B. What’s, It’s
C. What, It D. What, This is
19. __________ Tom. This is ____________ book.
A. I am, my B. I am, I
C. He is, he D. He is, her
20. _____________ are good students.
A. I and Tony B. Tony and I
C. Me and Tony D. Tony and me
21. Is that your ______________
A. an old bike B. a old bike
C. old bikes D. old bike
V. 连词成句。
1. that, a, is, school. _______________________
2. ruler, it, a, is. _______________________
3. English, this, in is, what. ________________________
4. his, it, dictionary, isn’t._________________________
5. you, do, game, how, spell. __________________________
VI. 根据短文内容，选择正确答案。
Jenny：Look! Three people are over there. One is in the red car.
and the other two are behind the car. Who is that man
Tim：Which man
Jenny：The man in the red car.
Tim：Oh, that is my father.
Jenny：Who’s the other man
Tim：He is my uncle.
Jenny：Is that woman your mother
Tim：No, the woman behind the car is not my mother.
She is my English teacher. My mother is at home.
1. How many people are there in the car
A. One. B. Five. C. Three. D. Six.
2. Who is in the car
A. Tim’s father. B. Jenny’s father.
C. Tim’s uncle. D. Tim’s teacher.
3. Where is Tim’s uncle
A. In the car. B. At home.
C. Behind the car. D. At school.
4. How many people are together with Tim’s father
A. Four. B. Two C. One D. Three.
5. The woman behind the car is ________________.
A. Tim’s mother B. Tim’s teacher
C. Jenny’s teacher D. their teacher
VII. 将下列句子变成一般疑问句，并作肯定或否定回答。
1. He is Mr Black. _______________________________ Yes, ______________.
2. I am in Grade 1. _______________________________ No, ______________.
3. You are workers. ______________________________ No, ______________.
4. This is my book. _______________________________ Yes, _____________.
5. That is an English dictionary. _____________________ No, _____________.
VIII. 阅读下列启事，判断正（T）误（F）。
（1）Lydia’s telephone number is 442-697.
（2）David’s computer game is lost.
（3）Liza’s backpack is in the lost and found case.
（4）Ely’s ID card is lost.
（5）529903 is Ely’s phone number.
IX. 书面表达
假如你是David，你的电话是32356824。你的字典丢失了，请写一则寻物启事。
【试题答案】
I. 1. D 2. A 3. C 4. E 5. B
II. 1. is, is 2. am, is 3. is, is
4. are, am 5. is, is 6. is, is
7. am, am 8. is, is 9. is, is
10. are, is
III. 1. English, backpack, spell 2. baseball
3. dictionary 4. notebook
5. watch 6. computer game
7. key
IV. 1. B 2. B 3. D 4. A 5. D
6. C 7. D 8. C 9. D 10. A
11. B 12. A 13. B 14. C 15. B
16. C 17. C 18. B 19. D 20. B
21. D
V. 1. Is that a school
2. Is it a ruler
3. What is this in English
4. Isn’t it his dictionary
5. How do you spell game
VI. 1. A 2. A 3. C 4. B 5. B
VII. 1. Is he Mr. Black yes, he is.
2. Are you in Grade 1 No, I am not.
3. Are you workers No, we aren’t.
4. Is this your book Yes, it is.
5. Is that an English dictionary No, it isn’t.
VIII. 解析：以found与lost为依托，综合训练本单元的重点句型。
（1）F。（由call Lydia at 224-3638可知）
（2）T。（由文首的lost可知）
（3）F。（由liza询问Mitchell的语气可知）
（4）F。（由文首的Found可知）
（5）T。（由call Ely at 529903可知）
IX. 略
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 12 页 共 12 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
期中综合练习
I. 选出每组中不同范畴的词。
（ ）1. A. socks B. pants
C. short D. sweater
（ ）2. A. breakfast B. lunch
C. dinner D. salad
（ ）3. A. banana B. cream
C. pear D. orange
（ ）4. A. chicken B. broccolic
C. strawberry D. carrot
（ ）5. A. take B. join
C. has D. like
（ ）6. A. telephone B. gold
C. television D. computer
（ ）7. A. racket B. baseball
C. ping-pong D. soccer
（ ）8. A. dresser B. table
C. sofa D. plant
（ ）9. A. wall B. floor
C. where D. room
（ ）10. A. brother B. sister
C. cousin D. friend
II. 单项选择。
（ ）1. ________ Colin Black.
A. He’s B. She’s
C. Her name is D. They’re
（ ）2. __________ is my English teacher.
A. Paul Smith B. Smith Paul
C. Kate Linda D. Linda Kate
（ ）3. There’s _______ “u” and ______ “l” in the word “ruler”.
A. a, a B. an, an
C. a, an D. an, a
（ ）4. Sorry. This is not __________ eraser.
A. an B. my an
C. a my D. an my
（ ）5. Is that your mouse No, __________.
A. it is B. it isn’t
C. that is D. that isn’t
（ ）6. This isn’t _________ bag. _______ is ________ bag.
A. her, Its, her B. his, It, she
C. his, Its, her D. his, It, her
（ ）7. A bird is _________ the tree and there are apples ________ the tree.
A. in, in B. on, on
C. in, on D. on, in
（ ）8. _______ you know the girl _______ red
A. Are, with B. Are, in
C. Do, of D. Do, in
（ ）9. Let’s ________ football. Watching TV is not __________.
A. to play, interesting B. play, interesting
C. to play the, boring D. play a, boring
（ ）10. My father _______ lunch at home.
A. hasn’t B. haven’t
C. don’t have D. doesn’t have
（ ）11. It’s raining outside. _________ a raincoat with you, please, _______ it back tomorrow.
A. Take, Take B. Bring, Bring
C. Take, Bring D. Bring, Take
（ ）12. Look! Some salad ________ here and some hamburgers ________ on the plate.
A. is, is B. are, are
C. is, are D. are, is
（ ）13. Thank you very much. ___________.
A. All right B. Right
C. That’s right D. You’re welcome
（ ）14. What color ________ Jim’s shoes __________ black.
A. is, It’s B. are, They’re
C. is, Its D. are, They looks
（ ）15. Is there ________ in the bottle
A. any oranges B. two oranges
C. many orange D. any orange
（ ）16. There _______ lots of food in the kitchen.
A. have B. has
C. is D. are
（ ）17. There’s some _________ in the fridge.
A. apple B. bananas
C. meat D. eggs
（ ）18. There’s a __________ shop. It sells apples, pears, bananas and oranges.
A. clothes B. shoes
C. drink D. fruit
（ ）19. What _________ your sister have ________ breakfast
A. do, for B. does, for
C. is, for D. is, at
（ ）20. We can buy ________ there.
A. lot of thing B. a lot of thing
C. lots of thing D. lots of things
（ ）21. I like a glass of coke ________ ice.
A. and B. with
C. or D. but
（ ）22. We drink _________ every day.
A. broccoli B. milk
C. salad D. fish
（ ）23. I want to buy that T-shirt ______ blue ________ a good price.
A. of, in B. in, of
C. in, at D. of, at
（ ）24. I will draw a cat _________ color pens.
A. in B. of
C. at D. with
（ ）25. Let me ___________ it.
A. to do B. do to
C. do D. to
（ ）26. Those ________ cost me 45 __________.
A. photo, yuans B. photos, yuan
C. photos, yuans D. photoes, yuan
（ ）27. Robert often ________ my notebook _______ home.
A. brings, to B. brings, /
C. takes, / D. takes, to
III. 根据句意，用所给词的正确形式填空。
1. __________ name is Linda. (she)
2. Those are my __________. (friend)
3. __________ for the great photo of your family. (thank)
4. There are __________ on the wall. (photo)
5. __________ Mike have a baseball (do)
6. That __________ good. (sound)
7. He only _______ TV at home. (watch)
8. Sue __________ a great sports collection. (have)
9. We eat lots of __________ food. (health)
10. Do you think this book is __________. (interest)
IV. 句型转换。
1. He has 5 volleyballs. （改为否定句）
_________________________________________________________________________
2. My keys are in the drawer. （就划线部分提问）
_________________________________________________________________________
3. I have a baseball bat. （改为一般疑问句）
_________________________________________________________________________
4. She plays sports every day. （改为一般疑问句，并作否定回答）
_________________________________________________________________________
5. There are oranges in the boxes. （改为单数句）
_________________________________________________________________________
6. Is this your photo （改为复数句）
_________________________________________________________________________
7. It’s a nice watch. （改为复数句）
_________________________________________________________________________
8. My phone number is 8866998.（就划线部分提问）
_________________________________________________________________________
9. The picture is on the wall.（就划线部分提问）
_________________________________________________________________________
10. Do you like tomatoes （将主语改为he）
_________________________________________________________________________
V. 从II栏中找出I栏相应的答语
A
B
VI. 选用am, is, are, do, does, am not, isn’t, aren’t, don’t, doesn’t填空。
1. What _______________ your father like
2. What _______________ we eat for supper
3. They _______________ like dessert and ice cream.
4. She _______________ sell school things. She sells clothes.
5. How much _______________ the shoes
6. Chicken _______________ very nice food.
7. It _______________ healthy food. Don’t eat it, please.
8. They _______________ my parents. They are Tom’s parents.
9. I _______________ Lucy. My name is Lily.
10. I _______________ going on a picnic with my friend.
VII. 完形填空。
A
Mr White likes fish very much. He often 1 some fish in the shop in the morning and takes home 2 . But Mrs White often 3 her friends to their home to have lunch and eat fish. One day, when Mr White comes home 4 , he 5 his fish. And Mrs White says their cat 6 the fish. Mr White is very 7 . He takes the cat 8 the shop near their house to weigh（称重量）the cat. He says, “You see my fish is one kilo, and this cat is
9 kilo, too. My fish is here. Then 10 is my cat ”
（ ）1. A. sells B. buys
C. sell D. buy
（ ）2. A. supper B. in supper
C. at supper D. for supper
（ ）3. A. asks B. says
C. lets D. has
（ ）4. A. in the morning B. in the afternoon
C. in the evening D. at night
（ ）5. A. don’t see B. doesn’t find
C. isn’t see D. can’t find
（ ）6. A. have B. eats
C. finds D. sees
（ ）7. A. hungry B. happy
C. angry D. thirsty
（ ）8. A. to B. from
C. in D. at
（ ）9. A. one B. two
C. three D. four
（ ）10. A. what B. where
C. how D. who
B
My name is Bill. I’m an American boy. I’m twelve. I’m a student 1 a middle school. I’m in Class 4, Grade 1. Li Lei is my friend. We’re in the 2 class. He is eleven. Here is a picture of 3 family. 4 look at it. His father, the one behind the tree, is a policeman. His mother, the one in the red hat, is a teacher of Chinese. He has 5 sisters. They are twins. Their names 6 Fangfang and Lingling. They have a cat. 7 name is Mimi. Look! It’s 8 the floor under the table. 9 twins are middle school students, too. They are in different 10 .
They look after me at school. We are good friends.
（ ）1. A. of B. to C. under D. behind
（ ）2. A. / B. same C. some D. one
（ ）3. A. her B. him C. his D. he
（ ）4. A. It’s B. Let us C. It D. Let
（ ）5. A. two B. five C. four D. three
（ ）6. A. is B. be C. am D. are
（ ）7. A. It’s B. It C. Its D. Its’
（ ）8. A. in B. on C. behind D. to
（ ）9. A. / B. The C. And D. A
（ ）10. A. grade B. row
C. schools D. classes
VIII. 阅读理解。
A
This Chinese boy is Li Lei. He’s twelve. He’s in No. 3 Middle School. He’s in Class Two, Grade One. His good friend is Jack. He’s an English boy. He’s in Li Lei’s school. He’s in Class One, Grade Two. Mrs Read is an English teacher in the school. She’s an English woman. Jack and Li Lei have a secret — Jack is their English teacher’s son.
（ ）1. Who’s in No. 3 Middle School _________.
A. Jack and Li Lei
B. Li Lei and his friends
C. Li Lei, Jack and Jack’s mother
（ ）2. What grade is Jack in ___________.
A. He’s in Grade One
B. He’s in Grade Two
C. He’s in Class One
（ ）3. How old is Jack ________.
A. He’s twelve
B. He’s not twelve
C. Sorry, I don’t know
（ ）4. Is Mrs Read an English teacher ___________.
A. Yes, she is
B. No, she isn’t
C. Mrs Read is
（ ）5. Are Jack and Li Lei good friends _________.
A. Yes, they are
B. No, they aren’t
C. They are
根据短文内容和首字母，填上一个适当的单词。
6. Jack and Mrs Read are E .
7. These two b have a secret.
8. Their English teacher is a w .
9. Jack and Li Lei are in the s school.
10. Li Lei is a Chinese boy. H school is No. 3 Middle school.
B
Frank and his brother Eli don’t go to school in the morning. They go to school after lunch, at one o’clock. They have math at one fifteen. Frank likes math because it’s interesting. Eli doesn’t like math. Frank and Eli have P.E after math. They both like their teacher, Mr. Bright, and they like P.E, because it’s fun. But Eli’s favorite subject is English and Frank’s is music. He plays the piano and the violin.
（ ）1. Frank likes math because it is _________.
A. interesting B. difficult C. great
（ ）2. Eli likes ________ best.
A. music B. English C. math
（ ）3. They like P.E because it is _________.
A. boring B. good C. fun
（ ）4. They have math class ________.
A. at one o’clock B. at one fifteen C. after two fifteen
（ ）5. Frank and Eli go to school ________.
A. in the morning B. in the afternoon C. on Sundays
C
A bus stops（停）at a small bus-stop（公共汽车站）. A man looks out of the window and sees a woman. She is selling（卖）cakes. The man wants to eat a cake, but the woman isn’t near here. It’s raining（下雨）and the man doesn’t want to go out in the rain. Soon（不久）, the man sees a boy. The boy is near the window. “Come here, boy!” The man says. “Do you know how much the cakes ” The boy says yes. The man gives forty fen and asks him to buy（买）two cakes. “One is for you and one is for me,” he says to the boy.
After a while（不一会）, the boy comes back. He’s eating a cake. He gives the man twenty fen and says, “Sorry, there is only one cake left（剩下）.”
1. —Where is the man — __________
A. He’s at home.
B. He’s in a bus.
C. He’s in a car.
2. —What’s the woman doing —____________
A. She’s eating cakes.
B. She’s making cakes.
C. She’s selling cakes.
3. —How many cakes does the woman have
— _____________
A. Only one. B. Two. C. Many.
4. —How much are two cakes —___________
A. Twenty fen. B. Forty fen. C. I don’t know.
5. —What’s the result（结果）
— __________
A. The man eats a cake.
B. The man doesn’t eat a cake.
C. The boy doesn’t eat a cake.
IX. 书面表达
根据下面内容写一段自我介绍的文章。
（1）介绍你的姓名、年龄和身份。
（2）介绍父母姓名及职业。
（3）介绍你的体育爱好。
（4）介绍你的食物爱好。
（5）介绍你对英语学习的看法。
【试题答案】
I. 1~5 CDBAC 6~10 BADCD
II. 1~5 AACAB 6~10 DCDBD 11 ~ 15 CCDBD
16~20 CCDBD 21~25 BBCDC 26 ~ 27BC
III. 1. Her 2. friends 3. Thanks 4. photos
5. Does 6. sounds 7. watches 8. has
9. healthy 10. interesting
IV. 1. He doesn’t have 5 volleyballs.
2. Where are your keys
3. Do you have a baseball bat
4. Does she play sports everyday No, she doesn’t.
5. There is an orange in the box.
6. Are these your photos
7. They’re nice watches.
8. What is your phone number
9. Where is the picture
10. Does he like tomatoes
V. A： FHGCE JABDI
B： DCBEA HIGJF
VI. 1~5 does, do, don’t doesn’t, are
6~10 is, isn’t, aren’t, am not, am
VII. A：BDACD BCAAB
B：ABCBA DCBBD
VIII. A：1~5 CBCAA
6~10 English, boys, woman, same, His
B：ABCBB
C：BCABB
IX. (One possible version)
My name is Li Hong. I’m thirteen years old. I’m a student of No. 1 Middle School. My father’s name is Li Yang and my mother’s name is Han Hui. They are both teachers. I like sports very much. My favorite sport is soccer. I eat healthy food. My favorite food is chicken. English is my new subject. I think English is very interesting. I like it very much.
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 2 页 共 9 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
Unit 6 Do you like bananas
（一）语言目标
谈论爱好和厌恶。
（二）语言功能
学会用英语表达自己喜欢或不喜欢的东西，询问别人是否喜欢，提出建议。
（三）重点句型
Do you like bananas Yes, I do./No, I don’t.
I like French fries. I don’t like tomatoes.
（四）主题词表
（五）重点词汇及短语
词汇：
like, hamburgers, tomatoes, broccoli, French fries, oranges, ice cream, salad, bananas, eggs, carrots, strawberry, apples, chicken, breakfast, lunch, dinner, fruit, vegetable.
短语：
a lot of like to do sth. like doing sth.
（六）语法
1. 动词like的用法。
2. 一般疑问句的肯定、否定回答。
3. 名词复数的使用。
（七）重难点分析：
1. 可数名词和不可数名词
（1）可数名词：
①定义：是可以计数的名词。
②可数名词前可以用a，an限定。
③可数名词前可以用one，two，three…限定。
④可数名词有复数形式。
（2）不可数名词：
①定义：指不能计数的名词。
②不可数名词前不可以用a，an限定。
③不可数名词前不可以用one，two，three…限定。
④不可数名词没有复数形式。
2. 一般名词的复数形式
（1）一般在名词词尾加-s。如：banana-bananas
（2）以-o，-s，-sh，-ch及-x结尾的名词，在词尾加-es构成复数形式。如：tomato-tomatoes
（3）有些以-o结尾的名词仍加-s。如：photo-photos
（4）以辅音字母加-y结尾的名词，把-y去掉，加-ies。如：family-families
（5）以-f或-fe结尾的名词，把-f，-fe去掉且加-ves。如：life-lives
（6）有些名词以改变拼写来构成复数形式。如：man-men
（7）有些名词单、复数相同。如：sheep-sheep
3. lots of大量的，许多的
lots of 在意思上与a lot of相同，都表示“大量、许多”，但lots of主要用于口语，两个都可以用来修饰可数名词和不可数名词，如：
I haven’t got a lot of time. 我们的时间不多了。
There was lots of money in the safe.
保险箱中有许多钱。
4. Do you like bananas 你喜欢香蕉吗？
Yes, I do. 是的，我喜欢。（肯定回答）
No, I don’t. 不，我不喜欢。（否定回答）
like是及物动词（vt.），意为“喜欢”“愿意”“想要”，后面可以加名词，代词宾客，动词不定式（to + v. 原形）或动名词（v. -ing）作宾语。例如：
I like this picture. 我喜欢这幅画。（接名词作宾语）
I like her very much. 我非常喜欢她。（接人称代词宾格作宾语）
They like to go with us. 他们喜欢和我们一起去。（接v. 不定式作宾语）
He likes reading in bed. 他喜欢躺在床上看书。（接v. -ing作宾语）
谓语动词为like (s)的一般现在时句式，变否定句要借助助动词do (does) not组成。如：
I don’t like this picture.
He doesn’t like reading in bed. （注意like不再加-s）
谓语动词为like (s)的一般现在时句式，变疑问句时，也要用助动词do (does)，即在句首加Do (Does)，句末用问号，回答时用Yes或No。如：
Do you like salad Yes, I do. /No, I don’t.
Does he like ice cream Yes, he does. /No, he doesn’t.
你知道什么时候用do，什么时候用does吗？
当主语为非单数第三人称时，用助动词do。
当主语为单数第三人称时，用助动词does。（does是do的单数第三人称形式）
5. 主语为第三人称单数时一般现在时的结构
肯定式：主语＋谓语 v. 的单数第三人称形式＋其他，如：
He likes bananas a lot. 他非常喜欢吃香蕉。
否定式：主语＋助动词（doesn’t）＋动词原形＋其他。
如：He doesn’t like bananas. 他不喜欢吃香蕉。
疑问式：助动词（Does）＋主语＋动词原形＋其他。
肯定回答：Yes，主语＋does。
否定回答：No，主语＋doesn’t。例如：
Does Kate like meat 凯特喜欢吃肉吗？
Yes, she does. 是的，她喜欢。
No, she doesn’t. 不，她不喜欢。
6. breakfast的用法
（1）泛指“早饭”，前面不加冠词，例如：
At what time do you have breakfast
你什么时候吃早点？
Chinese have porridge（粥） for breakfast.
中国人早饭吃粥。
（2）如果breakfast有修饰词，前面通常加不定冠词“a”。例如：
He had a quick breakfast this morning.
他今天早餐吃得很快。
拓展：
at breakfast 吃早饭时before breakfast 早饭前after breakfast 早饭后
（3）have sth. for breakfast. 早餐吃……
注：以上用法通用于lunch和supper，另外“吃早（午，晚）餐”常用have breakfast/lunch/supper。
7. like doing 与like to do
两者意思差不多，都是“喜欢做某事”的意思，但也有差别：
like doing 指习惯性的兴趣爱好；
like to do 指某一特定的动作。
例如：I like reading. But I don’t like to read now.
8. fish作可数/不可数名词的用法
fish可以作不可数名词，表示吃的“鱼肉”，没有复数形式；fish也可以作可数名词，表示“鱼”，复数形式为原形，但也可以加-es，表示不同种类的“鱼”，例如：
I like eating fish （fish指“鱼肉”）.
I catch（抓）many fish（fish指“鱼”，复数为原形）.
I catch three fishes （fishes指三种鱼）.
9. like用法小结
（1）like作介词，表示“像……一样”。例如：
You are like your father. 你长得像你爸爸。
Lucy’s hat looks like my cat.
Lucy的帽子看起来像我的猫。
其中be like＝look like。
（2）like作动词，表示“喜欢”。
like作动词时，其主要用法如下：
①like sth. （like接名词或人称代词宾格）如：
I like bananas very much. 我非常喜欢香蕉。
My mother is very clever. I like him very much.
为什么不用he呢？
我的弟弟非常聪明，我非常喜欢他。
②like＋doing sth. 如：
My brother likes swimming, but I like singing.
③like to do sth. 如：
He likes to cook now.
④like sb. to do sth.
I don’t like him to eat like that.
⑤like…a lot＝like…very much非常喜欢。如：
I like my mother a lot.
My brother likes running very much.
⑥like…a little 有点喜欢。如：
—Do you like basketball
—Yes, I like it a little.
10. 动词be和动词do
至目前我们已学过的动词中，出现了两种不同的动词作谓语，一种是动词be，另一种是动词do（即实义动词）。动词be不表示一个具体的动作，中文意思是“是”或“在”；动词do则表示一个比较具体的行为动作或心理活动，如：work, find, love, play, know, like等。在陈述句中，它们都根据主语人称和数的不同用不同的形式。
△动词be有am, is, are等不同形式，am用于主语为第一人称单数；is用于主语为第三人称单数he, she, it及其他单数或不可数名词，are用于主语为复数第一、二、三人称we, you, they及其他复数名词。
△动词do有do/does等形式，当主语为非单数第三人称时，用原形；当主语为单数第三人称时，用does。
△动词be的否定式是在be后加not，疑问式是把be放在主语前面。例如：
—I’m a boy. I’m not a girl. Are you a girl
我是一个男孩。我不是一个女孩。你是一个女孩吗？
—Is your home near your school
—Yes, it is.
你家在你们学校附近吗？ 是的。
△动词do的否定式及疑问式要借助于助动词do/does来构成。下面以work为例，请分析并归纳表中动词work在肯定句、疑问句及否定句中的变化情况。
肯定句 I/We/You/They/work here.My brother and sister work here.The two Americans work here.He/She/It works here.Mary works here.
疑问句及回答 Do you/they work here Do your brother and sister work here Do the two Americans work here Does he/she/it work here Does Mary work here Yes, I/we do.No, I/we don’t.Yes, they do.No, they don’tYes, he/she/ it does.No, he/she/it doesn’t
否定句 I/We/You/They don’t work here.My brother and sister don’t work here.The two Americans don’t work here.He/She/It doesn’t work here.Mary doesn’t work here.
（八）考题分析
[考题1]用a, an, some完成下列短语。
（1）___________ hamburgers
（2）____________ cake
（3）____________ tomato
（4）____________ orange
（5）____________ egg
（6）____________ salad
解析：本题考查要点1中可数名词用法，可数名词前可以加a, an限定。
答案：（1）some （2）a （3）a （4）an （5）an （6）a
[考题2]写出下列名词的复数形式。
knife _____________ woman _____________
people _____________ radio _____________
potato _____________ sheep _____________
box _____________ watch _____________
apple _____________ baby _____________
答案：knives, women, people, radios, potatoes, sheep, boxes, watches, apples, babies
[考题3]I have _____________ friends in Wuhan.
A. much B. a lots of C. lots of D. a lot
解析：此题是辨析表示“许多”的几种说法的区别。much修饰不可数名词，a lot of＝lots of都是修饰可数名词，因此本题选C。
答案：C
[考题4]连接问题与回答：
（1）Do you like French fries
（2）Does she like bananas
（3）Does he like oranges
（4）Do they like tomatoes
（5）What do you like to eat
a. I like hamburgers.
b. No, he doesn’t.
c. Yes, she does.
d. Yes, I do.
e. No, they don’t.
解析：此题考查要点4中like的一般现在时疑问句的回答。
答案：（1）d，（2）c，（3）b，（4）e，（5）a
[考题5]
（1）She _____________ oranges, but she _____________ apples.
A. like, don’t like B. likes, doesn’t likes
C. likes, doesn’t like D. likes, don’t like
（2）_____________ he _____________ a computer
A. Does, has B. Does, have
C. Do, have D. Is, having
解析：（1）本题考查主语为单数第三人称时一般现在时的肯定式和否定式结构。注意加助动词doesn’t后，like用原形。（2）本题考查一般现在时主语为单数第三人称时，一般疑问句的结构。
答案：（1）C （2）B
[考题6]
（1）I often _____________ supper before 7:00.
A. have B. eat C. have a D. have the
（2）Today is Mid-Autumn Day. We have _____________ lunch.
A. a big B. a light
C. big D. the big
解析：（1）句意为“我经常在七点以前吃晚饭。”吃早/中/晚饭，英语里用have breakfast/lunch/supper来表达。不用eat，也不能带冠词a/an/the。（2）句意为“今天是中秋节，我们吃了一顿_____________午餐。”have a big lunch表示吃了一顿丰盛的午餐，have a light lunch表示吃了少量的午餐。
答案：（1）A （2）A
[考题7] Do you like _____________ football after class
A. to play to B. playing
C. to play D. plays
解析：本题是问“下课后你喜欢踢足球吗？”，是指某一特定动作，故用like to do sth. 句型，且踢足球是“play football”。
答案：C
[考题8]I like eating _____________. Mum buys two _____________ for lunch.
A. fish, fish B. fish, fishes
C. fishes, fishes D. fish, fishs
解析：句意为“我喜欢吃鱼，妈妈为午餐买了两条鱼”。前一个fish指“鱼肉”，为不可数名词，后一个“fish”为可数名词，指“鱼”，复数为原形。
答案：A
[考题9]
（1）I _____________ my mother and I _____________ her very much.
A. like, like B. am like, likes
C. look like, am like D. am like, like
（2）假设你是Kate，看下面的表格，是非常喜欢，为有点喜欢，为根本不喜欢，写出表中所列内容。
Name hamburgers tomatoes apples
Kate
Tom
Paul
I don’t like ________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
解析：（1）句意为“我像我的妈妈，并且我非常喜欢她。”前一个like为介词，用be like/look like作谓语，后一个like为动词，主语为非单数第三人称，用原形作谓语。（2）本题考查了本单元重点语言目标——谈论喜欢和不喜欢，其中综合运用了要点4、5中主语为单数第三人称时，肯定句式和否定句式的用法，并且还考查了学生动手书写的能力。
答案：（1）D
（2）I don’t like hamburgers at all. But I like apples a little. My friend Tom likes tomatoes a little and he likes apples very much. My friend Paul likes hamburgers a lot, but he doesn’t like apples at all.
[考题10] （1）情景反应。
从B栏中找出与A栏中相对的答语。
A
①Does her father like oranges
②Does your sister like ice cream
③What do you like to have for lunch
④Do you like a broccoli
⑤Do they like vegetables
⑥Where are the apples
⑦Is the tomato green
⑧What color is the banana
B
A: Yes, I do.
B: No, it isn’t. It’s red.
C: In the basket.
D: No, they don’t.
E: No, he doesn’t.
F: It’s yellow.
G: I like French fries.
H: Yes, she does. She likes it very much.
（2）连词成句，注意字母大小写及标点符号：
①those, are, in, what, English （疑问句）
________________________________________________________
②he, like, does, hamburgers （疑问句）
________________________________________________________
③they, a, have, do, computer（疑问句）
________________________________________________________
④do, like, not, they, ice cream （陈述句）
________________________________________________________
⑤is, friend, Gina, my, this （陈述句）
________________________________________________________
解析：（1）本题中以连线形式考查了动词be和do的疑问句式及其回答。（2）本题以连词成句形式考查了动词be和do的陈述句式和疑问句式。
答案：（1）①E，②H，③G，④A，⑤D，⑥C，⑦B，⑧F
（2）①What are those in English
②Does he like hamburgers
③Do they have a computer
④They don’t like ice cream.
⑤This is my friend, Gina.
【模拟试题】（答题时间：70分钟）
I. 请根据语境，将所给单词填入下列各句。（5分）
A. apples B. breakfast C. carrotsD. hamburgers E. broccoli D. dinnerG. potatoes H. oranges I. saladJ. French fries
1. Tom likes fruit, so he likes __________ and __________.
2. —What vegetables do you like
—I like __________, __________ and __________.
3. I usually drink milk for __________ and __________.
4. —Do you like western food
—Yes, I like __________, __________ and __________.
II. 请根据首字母及句意填空。（5分）
5. There is a F book on the dresser.
6. Jones is a famous （著名的） r .
7. I have 52 baseball bats and l of baseballs.
8. My grandfather e potatoes for dinner every day.
9. —Do you like oranges, Tanya
—Yes, I do. They are h .
III. 请根据上下文及图片填写单词，补全短文。（5分）
Movie star Julia Lopez eats lots of healthy food. For breakfast, she has ___10___, ___11___, and ___12___. For lunch, she likes ___13___, ___14___, ___15___, and ___16___. And for dinner, she has ___17___, ___18___, and ___19___ for dessert.
IV. 冠词考场。请选出正确的一项填入空格中。（10分）
A. The B. 不填 C. an D. a
20. I have _________ banana and _________ apple.
21. Do you like _________ salad _________ salad is good.
22. For dinner, she has _________ chicken.
23. I don’t like _________ apples. What about you, Elena
24. This is _________ English book. _________ book isn’t Tom’s.
25. My brother has _________ soccer ball. But he doesn’t like playing _________ soccer.
V. 选择填空。（10分）
26. _________ your parents _________ bananas
A. Do, like B. Does, like C. Do, likes
27. —Does Bruce _________ chicken
—Yes, he _________.
A. likes, does B. likes, do C. like, does
28. —_________ your sister _________ salad every day
—No.
A. Do, have B. Does, have C. Does, has
29. My mother _________ fruits, but she likes vegetables.
A. like B. don’t like C. doesn’t like
30. Let’s _________ ice cream!
A. have B. has C. to have
31. _________ lunch, Bill and his brother _________ hamburgers and broccoli.
A. For, like B. For, likes C. To, like
32. Maggie has _________ food for breakfast.
A. lots B. lots of C. a lot
33. Runner eats _________.
A. good B. nice C. well
34. Tom likes salad, but his sister doesn’t like _________.
A. him B. them C. it
35. Eat fruits, they make you _________.
A. healthy B. difficult C. interesting
VI. 请为下列各句选择适当的答语。（5分）
（ ）36. Does she have a tennis racket
（ ）37. Do they like these interesting books
（ ）38. Let’s have carrot ice cream.
（ ）39. Thanks a lot.
（ ）40. Is there any salad on the table
A. Yes, they do.
B. You are welcome.
C. No, there isn’t.
D. Sorry, I don’t know.
E. That sounds great.
VII. 连词成句，并将各句填入下列短文，使其符合逻辑。（10分）
A. breakfast; he; every; eats; for; them; and; dinner; day
______________________________________________________
B. of; my; has; food; lots; mother; healthy
______________________________________________________
C. ice; you; like; do; cream
______________________________________________________
D. eating; like; I; fruit
______________________________________________________
E. well; we; eat
______________________________________________________
There are three people in my family. ____41____. My father likes tomatoes very much. ____42____. ____43____. And she likes salad and milk. ____44____, but I don’t like vegetables. For dessert, we like oranges and ice cream. ____45____
VIII. 短文填充。（20分）
A
根据图表，完成短文
breakfast lunch dinner
Rose eggs fish broccoli
Jack French fries hamburgers chicken
Rose and Jack are my friends. They eat different things every day. For breakfast, Rose likes ____46____, but Jack likes ____47____. For lunch, Jack ____48____ like fish, he likes hamburgers. And for ____49____, Rose has broccoli. I think Rose ____50____ healthy food.
B
Mary is a student. She is ____51____. She ____52____ many kinds of food. She likes fruit, ____53____ she doesn’t like ____54____. She likes junk food, too. So she is a little bit fat. She is not very ____55____.
51. （ ）
A. six year old B. six years old C. six years olds
52. （ ）
A. have B. has C. doesn’t have
53. （ ）
A. and B. or C. but
54. （ ）
A. oranges B. orange C. a orange
55. （ ）
A. difficult B. boring C. healthy
IX. 阅读理解。（20分）
A
请根据短文内容填写表格。
Bill has a brother Tom and a sister Lily. They have meals together every day. Bill and Tom like apples but Lily doesn’t like them. Lily likes carrots, but Bill hates them. Tom likes fruits but he doesn’t like vegetables. So their parents think they are not very healthy.
likes doesn’t like
Bill ___56___ ___57___
___58___ fruits ___59___
Lily ___60___ apples
B
读短文，判断正（T）误（F）。
One day, Tom and his father go out for a walk. Suddenly they see a big brown dog. The dog begins to bark（汪汪叫）. Tom is afraid. He wants to run home. His father says: “Don’t be afraid, Tom. Don’t you know the saying（谚语）, a barking dog does not bite（咬人） ”
“Oh, yes,” said Tom, “I know the saying, you know the saying, but does the dog know the saying ”
61. Tom and his father go home one day. （ ）
62. They see a big dog barking. （ ）
63. Tom isn’t afraid of the dog. （ ）
64. tom wants to run home. （ ）
65. The dog knows the saying, too. （ ）
X. 写作。（10分）
A
这是Jenny和她的好朋友Nancy，现在Jenny要向同学们介绍她和Nancy的饮食爱好，请你帮她写一个简短的发言稿。（5分）
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
B
假如你收到澳大利亚笔友John的来信，他提到自己的饮食习惯，也很想知道你一日三餐都喜欢吃什么，请你给他回信，说说自己感兴趣的食物。（注意格式）（5分）
___________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Yours,
_________
【试题答案】
I. 1. A; H
2. C; E; G
3. B; F
4. D; I; J
II.
5. French 6. runner 7. lots
8. eats 9. healthy
III.
10. eggs 11. broccoli 12. oranges
13. hamburgers 14. salad 15. chicken
16. strawberries 17. tomatoes 18. French fries
19. ice cream
IV.
20. D; C 21. B; A 22. B 23. B 24. C; A
25. D; B
V.
26. A 27. C 28. B 29. C 30. A
31. A 32. B 33. C 34. C 35. A
VI.
36. D 37 A 38. E 39. B 40. C
VII.
A. He eats them for breakfast and dinner every day.
B. My mother has lots of healthy food.
C. Do you like ice cream
D. I like eating fruit.
E. We eat well.
41. E 42. A 43. B 44. D 45. C
VIII.
（A）
46. eggs 47. French fries 48. doesn’t
49. dinner 50. eats/has
（B）
51. B 52. B 53. C 54. A 55. C
IX.
（A）
56. apples 57. carrots 58. Tom
59. vegetables 60. carrots
（B）
61. F 62. T 63. F 64. T 65. F
X.
（A）One possible version
Nancy and I are good friends. We like bananas very much. For breakfast, I like eggs and milk, but she likes hamburgers and coffee. For lunch, we like meat and vegetables. For dinner, I like fruit and coffee. Nancy likes oranges and ice cream.
（B）One possible version
Dear John,
Thanks for your letter. For breakfast, I have hamburgers and eggs. I like salad and pizza for lunch. For dinner, I have vegetables and ice cream. I like strawberry ice cream best. Do you like it
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 1 页 共 14 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
Unit 10 Can you play the guitar
一.教学内容：
Unit 10 Can you play the guitar
二. 语言目标（Language Goal）
谈论能力（Talk about abilities）
三. 语言功能
以学生的课外活动为话题：
1. 学会表达自己在某一方面所具备的才能；
2. 谈论自己的喜好与意愿；
3. 采访同学们对现有课外活动小组的看法；
4. 成立同学们自己喜爱的各种俱乐部并制作海报；
5. 学会写招聘广告。
四. 完成语言目标必备的重点句型
Can you swim
你会游泳吗？
Yes, I can.（No, I can’t.）
是我，我会。（不，我不会。）
I want to join the art club.
我想参加艺术俱乐部。
Can you play it well
你弹得好吗？
Can you help kids with swimming
你能教孩子游泳吗？
May I know your name
我能知道你的名字吗？
五. 重点词汇及主题词表
dance swim sing paint speak
Japanese日本人的 art艺术 music drums
piano trumpet violin guitar
六. 短语
play chess 下象棋 play the guitar 弹吉他
speak English 说英语 English club 英语俱乐部
art club 艺术俱乐部 music club 音乐俱乐部
chess 象棋 swimming club 游泳俱乐部
summer camp 夏令营 learn about 学习
fill out 填出 a little 少量
主题词表：
七. 语法
情态动词can的用法。
八. 疑难解析
1. 动词play的几种用法
（1）play表示“玩（球类）”或“玩棋牌及其他游戏”，这时作宾语的名词前不带任何冠词。如：play basketball/cards/chess/bridge/badminton打篮球/打牌/下棋/打桥牌/打羽毛球。
（2）play表示“演奏，弹奏（乐器）”，这时表示乐器的名词前须带定冠词the。如play the piano/violin。
（3）play表示“装扮、扮演”。如：play a doctor/ Lu Xun/ the fool扮一名医生/扮演鲁迅/装傻
（4）play with fire玩火，play with water玩水，play with balls玩球，这些短语中的介词with不能丢。
△play还有一些其他常见的用法和含义。
（5）play sth. for sb. = play sb. sth. 为某人播放……
（6）play + sth. + on + 乐器
用某乐器演奏（某乐曲）
2. help sb. do sth. 与help sb. with sth.
Can you help kids with swimming
你能教孩子游泳吗？
Help sb. with sth. 此词组的意思为“在某方面帮助某人”，还可以说help sb. do sth.。
如果上下文意义较明确时，两个词组可以互换。
注：在help sb. with sth. 结构中，with是介词，故动词应变为doing形式，doing相当于名词，作介词宾语。
Can you help kids with swimming
=Can you help kids swim
3. join的两种用法
I want to join the music club. 我想参加音乐俱乐部。
（1）结合、连接：Three roads join together here. 三条路在此会合。
（2）参加：join用作及物动词，后接表示人的名词或代词作宾语，表示和这些人一起进行某项活动。
My classmates all go to the zoo, but I don’t join them.
我的同学都去了动物园，但是我没有和他们一起去。
△join还用来表示参加军队、政党、组织等，成为其中的一员。如：
join the Party/ League/ WTO/ the army/ the music club
入党/入团/加入世贸组织/参军/加入音乐俱乐部
4. a little“一点儿”“稍微”
△它相当于一个程度副词，与very, very much相对，修饰形容词、副词或动词。如：
Swimming is a little/ very interesting.
游戏有点/很有趣。
She likes bananas a little/ very much.
她有点/很喜欢香蕉。
△a little表示数量，与some, much=a lot of= lots of相对，修饰不可数名词。如：
There is a little/some/much/water in the glass. 杯子里有点/些/许多水。
a little有时可单独用于省略句。如：
“Are you hungry ”“Yes, a little.”
“你饿了吗？”“是的，有点。”（a little= I’m a little hungry.）
“Can you speak Japanese ”“Yes, but only a little.”
“你能讲日语吗？”“是的，不过只能讲一点。”
5. show一词的两种用法
（1）Show what you can do.
△这是祈使句，句意为：展示你会做的吧/展示你的才能吧。
show在此处用作动词，表示“出示”，“把……拿给看”，一般用两种结构表示这一意思，即show sb. sth. 或show sth. to sb. “把某物给某人看。”如：
Can you show me your new guitar
=Can you show your new guitar to me
我可以看看你的新吉它吗？
△show还可以表示“带某人到……”“送某人到……”如：
Can you show me to the teacher’s office？
你能带我去老师的办公室吗？
（2）talent show才艺展示，show是名词。
作为名词表示“表演”，“展览”。如：
a dolphin show 海豚表演
a dog show 爱犬展览；赛狗会
a flower show 花卉展览
a car show 汽车展览会
6. be in的用法
Then maybe you can be in our school concert.
那么，或许你可以参加我们学校的音乐会。
△连系动词be与in搭配，有“参加”的意思。如：
Alan plays basketball well. He is in the basketball club.
艾伦篮球打得好，他参加了篮球俱乐部（成为俱乐部的一员）。
Victor is in our rock band.
维克托是我们摇滚乐队的成员。
7. maybe的用法
△maybe作副词，意为：大概，多半，或许。maybe的使用场合较多，现将一些常见的使用场合介绍如下：
（1）不能确定时，如：
Maybe she is at home. 或许她在家里。
（2）避免做明确的回答时，如：
“Can you come with us ”“Maybe!”
“你能和我们一起去吗？”“可能吧！”
（3）有礼貌地向别人提出要求时，如：
Maybe you can phone me tonight.
或许你可在今晚打电话给我。
△maybe与may be的区别
首先两个词在意思上都表示推测，但词性不同。maybe是副词，may be是may + be动词构成的谓语。如：
He isn’t here. He may be at home.
他没来，他可能在家里。
△may还可用来表示请求许可，相当于can，May/Can I…？我可以……吗？如：
May/Can I come in 我可以进来吗？
8. want用法小结
△want的本意为“要，想要、需要、希望。”如：
We want two good musicians for our rock band.
我们摇滚乐队需要两位优秀的音乐人。
△musicians wanted for school concert/rock band
学校音乐会/摇滚乐队招收音乐人
wanted译为：招收、招聘
△want常见的搭配：want to do sth. 想干某事。
Want sb. to do sth. 想要某人干某事
Want a go 想试一试
9. fill out填写表格
fill out与fill in是同义词组，为动词fill +副词组成的动副短语，及物。如：
Read the conversation and fill in the card.
读这个会话，然后填这张卡片。
Here is a card. Please fill it out.
这儿有张卡片，请填一下。
△动副结构的动词短语，如果是代词作宾语，那么这个代词宾语必须放在动词和副词之间，因此Please fill it out.不能写成Please fill out it。
常见的动副结构的短语有：
10. can的用法
can是英语中最常用的几个情态动词之一，它没有人称和数的变化，不能独立作谓语，必须与主要的谓语动词的原形连用。
△can本身不表示动作，只表示体力或脑力方面的能力。例如：
（1）I/ We/ You/ She/ He/ They can speak Chinese.
我/我们/你/你们/她/他/他们/会说汉语。can无人称和数的变化，表示脑力方面的能力。
（2）I/We/You/She/He/They can carry the heavy box.
我/我们/你/你们/她/他/他们搬得动这个重箱子。表示体力方面的能力。
注：情态动词本身无人称和数的变化，后面的动词用原形。
△情态动词的否定式由情态动词加not构成，如：I/We/You/He/She/It/They can’t swim.
can’t=can not
我/我们/你/你们/他/她/它/他们不会游泳。
△情态动词Yes/No问句的构成：将情态动词can置于句首，后接句子的主语和主要谓语动词即可。
如：—Can you/he/she/it/they can swim
你/他/她/它/他们会游泳吗？
—Yes, I/he/she/it/they can.
是的，我/他/她/它/他们会游泳。
No, I/he/she/it/they can’t. 不，不会。
△can还可以与疑问词一起用在特殊疑问句中。如：
Who can swim？谁会游泳？
The fish can swim. 鱼会游泳。
What can the cat do？It can drink its milk.
猫会干什么？它会喝它的牛奶。
（3）△“Can we...？”一般疑问句表示说话人请求对方的许可，询问可不可以做某件事。如：
“Can we put our coats here ”“Oh, yes, you can.”
“我们可不可以把我们的外套放在这儿？”“噢，当然可以。”
11. be good at/ with及系表结构的动词短语
英语中有大量的由连系动词be与表语构成的系表结构的短语。如：
Are you good with children
Tony can dance. He dances well. He is good at dancing.
托尼会跳舞。他跳得很好。
△句中的
都是系表结构的动词短语。
△常见的系表结构的动词短语有：
be late for class/ school/ the meeting上课（上学，开会）迟到
be at the shop/ office/factory 在商店，在办公室，在工厂
be back 回来 be free 有空
be busy 忙 be in 在家
be sorry 抱歉，难过，遗憾
be here/there 在这儿/在那儿
be born 出生
12. good与well的区别
△good和well都当“好”讲，但词性不同，good是形容词，well是副词，如：He is a good student. 他是个好学生。“good”在句中是定语修饰名词。
Tom can play the guitar, but he can’t play it very well.
汤姆会弹吉他，但弹得不太好。
“well”是副词修饰动词play。
△well也可用作形容词与fine同义，表示身体好，如：
—How is your father
你爸爸身体好吗？
—He’s fine/well. Thank you.
很好，谢谢你。
13. speak, say, talk和tell
say指用语言表达思想，着重说话的内容或强调说话这一动作，不表示说话的性质。例如：He always says it.
speak强调说话的动作、声音，而不强调内容。在正式场合表示发言、演讲，说某种语言用speak。例如：He is speaking at the meeting. 又如：He speaks Russian.
talk表示两个人或多个人在一起讲话、谈论（多指随意谈论）。
例如：I don’t like to talk to him.
talk一般有在讲话中交换思想的意思，speak则可以用来指只有一个人在说话。
tell的意思是“告诉，讲述、吩咐”，讲故事或讲笑话多用tell。
例如：She loves to tell stories.
九. 考题解析
［考题1］—Can you help kids __________ swimming
—Yes, I can.
A. for B. to C. in D. with
［解析］你能帮助孩子学游泳吗？可以。Help sb. with为固定搭配。
［答案］D
［考题2］汉译英。
（1）Tom likes football, He wants _______ _______ the _______ club.
汤姆喜欢踢足球。他要参加足球俱乐部。
（2）Look. They are dancing（正在跳舞）。
Let’s ________ _________.
看！他们正在跳舞，我们和他们一起跳吧。
Let’s后的动词用原形。
［解析］此题主要考查join + 宾语，及join + in + 宾语的用法。由上栏的讲解和题意可知：（1）want to do. 想干某事。（2）考查join in的用法。注意in后面用they的宾格them。
［答案］（1）to，join，football（soccer）（2）join，them
［考题3］（1）—Would you like some more rice （你再吃点饭好吗？）
—Yes, just _________.
A. a few B. few C. little D. a little
（2）I don’t like the book. It’s _______ scary（恐怖）.
A. very much B. much C. a little D. little
（2002年黄冈市中考题）
［解析］（1）此题考查a little修饰不可数名词的用法。句意：好吧，再吃一点。注意：few, a few修饰可数名词。（2）句意：我不喜欢这本书，它有点恐怖。scary是个形容词，不能被very much修饰，very much一般修饰动词。
［答案］（1）D （2）C
［考题4］（1）我可以看看你的新球吗？（两种结构）
Can you ________ ________ your new ball
Can you ________ your new ball ________ me
（2）在花卉展览上，我们可以学到很多花卉知识。
We can learn a lot from the ________ ________.
（3）在才艺展示中展现你的才能吧。
________ what you can do in the ________ ________.
［解析］此题主要考查show作动词和名词的用法及其搭配。由上栏讲解和题意可知，答案为（1）show, me, show, to；（2）flower, show；（3）Show, talent show。
［考题5］选择填空，完成句子。
（1）Kate plays the guitar well. She is ________ (join, in) the rock band.
（2）Ahan wants to ________ (join, in) the basketball club. Now he is ________ (in, at) the basketball club.
［解析］join与be in是同义词“参加”，但结构不同。Join是行为动词带宾语：join the club。be是连系动词与in搭配。
［答案］（1）in（2）join，in
［考题6］用may, maybe填空。
（1）—________ I have your name
—John.
（2）—How old is he
—Forty.
—He can’t be（不可能）forty.
—________ he is thirty-five.
［解析］此题主要考查副词maybe与情态动词may与be的搭配，它们在形式上相似，极易混淆。（1）句意：我可以知道它的名字吗？表示请求许可，选情态动词May。（2）句意：他不可能有40岁，他大概35岁。句中动词为“is”不是be，选Maybe。
［考题7］汉译英：（注意词形！）
（1）学校足球队招收运动员。
Players ________ ________ our football team.
（2）我们摇滚乐队需要两名优秀的音乐人。
We ________ two good ________ ________ our rock band.
（3）李梅想参加音乐俱乐部吗？是的，但是她妈妈却想她参加英语俱乐部。
—Does Li Mei ________ ________ ________ the music club
—Yes, she does. Her mother wants ________ ________ ________ the English club.
［解析］此题主要考查want用作及物动词的用法，注意want后面的宾语形式，由上栏的讲解和题意可知。
［答案］（1）wanted for（2）want, musicians, for（3）want to join, her（宾格）to join
［考题8］照样子改写下列句子。
Examples（例）：
Put on your coat.
Put your coat on.
Put it on.
（1）Put on your socks.
（2）Fill out the card.
（3）Take off your shoes.
［解析］动副结构的动词短语若带的是名词作宾语，宾语既可放在动词和副词之间，也可放在短语之后；若带的是代词宾语，宾语只能放在动词和副词之间。
［答案］
（1）Put your socks on. Put them on.
（2）Fill the card out. Fill it out.
（3）Take your shoes off. Take them off.
［考题9］（1）—Can you speak English
—Yes, I can. I’m ________ ________ ________（我的英语很出色）。
（2）________（对不起），I’m late.
（3）—Can you come to my house
—Sorry, I can’t. ________ very busy.
（4）—Is everyone here （都到了吗？）
—No, Li Lei isn’t ________. He’s ________ ________（在家里）。
［解析］此题主要考查几个常见的系表结构的动词短语，由上栏的讲解和题意可知。
［答案］（1）good at English （2）Sorry （3）I’m （4）here，at home
［考题10］（1）Do you eat ________ food every day (good/well) It’s very important.
（2）The runner eats ________ (good/well).
She eats healthy food.
［解析］（1）句意：你每天都吃好的食物吗？句中food是名词，应被形容词修饰。
（2）句意：这个运动员吃得好，她吃健康的食品。eat是动词，应与副词搭配。
［答案］（1）good （2）well
［考题11］用speak，say，tell，talk填空。
（1）Tom ________ he can ________ a little Chinese.
（2）Do you often（经常）________ to Kate No, I don’t. I often ________ her funny stories.
［解析］此题主要考查有“说”的词义的辨析，由上栏的讲解和题意可知。
［答案］（1）says（第三人称单数），speak（在can后）
（2）talk，tell
［考题12］假设你是某中学音乐俱乐部的负责人之一，请你为俱乐部写份招聘广告，内容：包括对面试者的要求、联系人及联系方式等。
［解析］通过写广告进一步巩固目标语言、鼓励学生积极参加各种形式的课外活动，参考答案如下：
Musicians wanted for Music Club
Are you a musician Can you dance Can you sing Can you play the piano, the trumpet, the drums, or the guitar Then maybe you can be in our fantastic club, please call Lil at 790-4230.
【模拟试题】
测试时间：90分钟 满分：100分
I. 看图根据提示完成句子。（30分）
1. Xiao Ming is a good _______ player.
And she can _______ well.
2. —Can Wang Nan play _______
—Sure. She is very good at _______ .
3. In China, Hao Haidong does well in _______. He can play _______ very well.
4. Li Lida can _______ very well. He is a good _______.
5. We are the _______ （音乐家）of our school _______（乐队）. Look! Victor can play the _______.
Jennifer can play the _______.
Bill can play the _______ .
Zhang Yi can’t play the _______ . But he can play the _______ very well.
II. 选择填空。（20分）
1. Then ________ you can be in our school concert.
A. maybe B. may be C. may D. be
2. —Can you paint —________
A. Yes, I am. B. No, I am.
C. No, I can’t. D. Yes, I do.
3. —Can you draw
—________
A. Yes, a little. B. No, I’m not.
C. Yes, please. D. No, I don’t.
4. My sister can ________.
A. sing B. sings C. to sing D. singing
5. Beidaihe Kids Summer Camp needs help ________ sports.
A. of B. with C. for D. in
6. Tom can play the guitar but he can’t play it ________.
A. well B. good C. nice D. fine
7. Bill can play ________ piano. He can also play ________ soccer.
A. the, the B. the, × C. ×, the D. ×，×
8. I can ________ Chinese Kung Fu.
A. make B. do C. think D. have
9. He wants to join the ________ club. He can _______ chess.
A. chess’s, play the B. chess, play
C. chessing, play D. chess’, plays the
e and join ________.
A. we B. our C. us D. in us
III. 将下列句子变成否定句和一般疑问句，并对一般疑问句进行肯定和否定的回答。（30分）
1. Li Ping watches TV every day.
Li Ping _______ _______ TV every day.
_______ Li Ping _______ TV every day
Yes, _______ _______. / No, _______ _______.
2. Alice does her homework at night.
Alice _______ _______ her homework at night.
_______ Alice _______ her homework at night
Yes, _______ _______. /No, _______ _______.
3. I have chicken for breakfast.
I _______ _______ chicken for breakfast.
_______ _______ _______ chicken for breakfast
Yes, _______ _______. /No, _______ _______.
4. My brother can run very fast.
My brother _______ _______ very fast.
_______ _______ brother _______ very fast
Yes, _______ _______. /No, _______ _______.
IV. 阅读理解。（10分）
One day a rabbit asks her mother, “Can you help me get dressed ” The mother says, “Yes, I can. But I can’t help you now. You are three years old. You can do many things. Look at your brother and your sister. They can get dressed. They can wash their faces and brush their teeth. They can help me cook breakfast and clean the room. You can do these things. Why don’t you ” Now the rabbit understands her mother’s meaning. It’s wrong to ask her mother to do many things for her. She wants to learn（学会）to do all the things.
Do you do all these things
1. Can the Mother Rabbit help her child get dressed this time（这次）？
________________________________________________________
2. How old is the rabbit
________________________________________________________
3. What can her sister and brother do
________________________________________________________
4. Does the rabbit understand her mother’s meaning
________________________________________________________
5. Does she want to learn to do all the things
________________________________________________________
V. 写作园地。（10分）
学校要扩招特长生充实到各个俱乐部中，Jerry想参加音乐俱乐部。Jerry会唱歌、跳舞和吹喇叭，他想学有关音乐方面的知识。他的电子邮件地址为Jerry@157 ( mailto:他的电子邮件地址为Jerry@157 ) com.请你写出Jerry和主考老师的对话。
___________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
【试题答案】
I. 1. basketball, sing
2. ping-pong, it
3. soccer, it
4. swim, swimmer
5. musicians, band, trumpet, drums, violin, piano, guitar
II. 1. A“maybe”表示“或许”“大概”在句中作状语，而may be表示“可能是”。
2. C 根据一般疑问句的回答方式确定。
3. A 由句意可知应选A。
4. A can为情态动词，后接动词原形。
5. B “need help with…”“需要……方面的帮助”。
6. A 修饰动词短语主要应用到副词well，不能用形容词。
7. B 乐器名词前一段要用the，球类名词前不用the。
8. B “do Chinese Kung Fu”玩中国武功
9. B 棋类俱乐部chess club。下棋play chess。
10. C 加入某人的行列用join sb.，动词后用宾格人称代词。
III. 1. doesn’t watch Does, watch he does he doesn’t
2. doesn’t do Does, do she does she doesn’t
3. don’t have Do you have I do I don’t
4. can’t run Can your, run he can he can’t
IV. 此题是道综合性、可读性较强的好文章，文中多次出现本单元中的重点词12个，特别是动词。
1. No, she can’t. 2. It’s three years old.
3. They can do many things.
4. Yes, she does. 5. Yes, she does.
V. 略
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 1 页 共 12 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
Unit 4 Where is my backpack
语言目标：（Language Goals）
Talk about where things are. （谈论物品在哪儿）
语言功能：
以谈论房子里的物品为话题，学会用英语询问和回答“东西在哪里”。
重点句型：
1. Where is the baseball
It’s in the backpack.
Where are his keys
They’re on the dresser.
2. Is the baseball on the sofa
No, it isn’t.
Are the books on the bed
Yes, they are.
3. There is a computer on my desk.
There are books in the bookcase.
重点词汇短语：
table，bed，dresser，bookcase，sofa，chair，pencil case，math book，alarm clock，video cassette，computer game，behind，under，next to，between
语法：
1. where问句。
2. Yes / No 问句及其简单回答。
3. 静态的方位介词on，in等的用法。
4. 定冠词the的用法。
重、难点解析：
1. 当我们想知道某人或某物在哪儿时，如何提问？
Where is / are + …
当我们想知道某个物品在哪儿时，我们通常用Where is / are … 句型来提问。如：Where is my backpack
△where是疑问副词，意思是在哪里，后面用一般疑问句句型。
△当询问的物品数量为单数时，其前的be动词应使用is，因为该物品在问句中提到过，所以回答时用代词it代替该物品。如：
— Where is / Where’s my baseball
我的棒球在哪儿？
— It’s in the backpack.
在背包里。
△当所询问的物品数量为复数时，其前的be动词使用are，因为该物品在问句中提到过，所以回答时用代词they代替该物品。如：
— Where are my books
我的书在哪儿？
— They’re on the sofa.
在沙发上。
注：Where are 不能缩写。
where还可以用于询问某人在哪儿，某个地方在哪儿。如：
2. 当你不确定某人或某物在哪儿而加以猜测时，如何提问？
当我们不确定某人或某物在哪儿而加以猜测时，我们常使用下列的句型（Yes / No问句）：
如：— Where are my books 我的书在哪儿？
— I don’t know. 我不知道。
— Are they on the bed 在床上吗？
— No, they’re not (they aren’t) .
不，不在。
3. 如何确认某人或某物的所在位置（空间关系）——表示地点的介词：
in on under next to behind
介词（前置词）是一种虚词，它不能单独担任句子成分，必须与名词或代词或相当于名词的其他词类、短语构成介词短语，才能担任句子成份。
英语中介词的数量并不多，但每个介词通常都有多种意思，如in既可表示时间（in the morning 在上午），又可表示地点。同时，同样的介词和不同的动词组成意思各异的动词短语，如look at （看），look for （寻找）。所以介词对于同学们来讲，还是比较难的。介词在英语中的使用频率也很高，仅次于冠词，学好它也是非常重要的。在这个单元我们只学五个静态的方位介词。
△in（in表地点、场所、部位等）在……里，在……中
in Class One 在一班
in the desk 在课桌里
in Beijing 在北京
△on （表示接触）在……上
on the wall 在墙上
on the floor 在（室内）地上
△under 在……正下方，在……下面，底下
under the chair 在椅子下
under the tree 在树下
△behind 在……后面
behind the door 在门后
behind the tree 在树后
△next to 紧靠，邻近
the man next to her 坐在她旁边的男子（her是she的宾格）
Tom is next to me. 汤姆住在我隔壁。（me是I的宾格）
△拓展：介词后面的成分叫介词宾语，如果是人的代词应用宾格形式。
4. 定冠词the的基本用法
英语的名词在前面加上a、an和the的情形极为频繁，a、an和the即是所谓的冠词。冠词的用法特别繁多，应一一牢记。例如：a dog （一只狗），the dog 这只狗。
△冠词是虚词，本身不能单独使用，也没有词义，它用在名词的前面，帮助指明名词的含义。冠词分为不定冠词a /an和定冠词the两种。不定冠词仅用在单数可数名词前面，表示“一”的意义，但不强调数目概念，只表示名词为不特定者。
△定冠词the的基本用法
定冠词the表示名词为特定者，有this，these，that或those之含义。用在可数名词单数、复数和不可数名词前，表示某个／某些特定的人或事物。
（1）指上文提到过的人或事物。如：
I have a new pencil. The pencil (= It ) is in my pencil case. 我有一支新铅笔。那支铅笔在我的文具盒里。（the指前面提到过的那支铅笔）
（2）指对话双方都知道的那个人或事物（本单元主要是学会这种用法）。如：
— Where’s the backpack
背包在哪儿？
— It’s under the table.
在桌子下面。
（特指我们房子里的背包和桌子，而不是别的房间里的，是对话双方都知道的背包和桌子。）
— Who’s the boy under the tree 树下的那个男孩是谁？（特指树下的男孩，树是对话双方都知道的那一棵树。）
注：the只有一种书写形式，但发音有两种形式，在以辅音开头的词前读为；在元音开头的词前读为。如：the pen 这支钢笔，这个苹果。
5. between … and … 在……和……之间
这个介词短语所连接的两个名词或代词表示的是两个人、两个不同物或两个点（时间、数字或场所）。如：
（1） Who’s that boy between your parents
你父母亲之间的那个男孩是谁？
（2） There is a map between the door and the window.
门窗之间的墙上有一幅地图。
（3） He is at home between six and seven in the evening.
他晚上6点到7点之间在家里。
△表示在两个同类人或物之间可在介词between后面接复数名词。如：
（4） There is a photo of my family between the two windows.
两扇窗户之间有一张我家的全家照。
6. 朋友、熟人之间如何请求对方帮忙做某事？Can you …
Can you … 这一句型常用于朋友、熟人之间请求对方帮忙做某事的情景。如：
Can you take these books to the classroom
你能帮着把这些书带到教室去吗？
△Can you … 作肯定的回答常用Certainly 或 Sure；否定的回答有Sorry, I can’t 或Sorry，然后说出理由。如：
A：Can you help me, Lucy 露茜，你能帮我吗？
B：Certainly, Dad. 当然可以，爸爸。
△如果是表示有礼貌的请求或委婉地提出问题，则用Could you …？如：
Could you be here at 7 o’clock tomorrow morning
你明天早上7点能到这儿吗？
7. bring与take
bring “带来、拿来”，它的反义词是take “拿到、带到”，它们都与介词to搭配。
△take … to 表示“把某物或某人带到某场所去”。take具有很强的方向性，强调带到另一场所去，而不是带到说话人的地方来。
如：Please take these things to your brother. 请把这些东西带给你弟弟。
△bring … to bring与take正好相反，bring … to表示把某物或某人给某人带来或带到说话人的场所来，即带来，而不是带走（take）。
Can you bring some things to school, mummy
妈妈，你能带些东西到学校来吗？
△take是英语中一个非常活跃的词，组合力很强。
注：take和bring后所接的场所若是 there，here，home等副词，to则要省去。如：
Take your bike there.
把你的自行车拿到那儿去。
Bring your pen home.
把你的钢笔带回来。
8. at和in
at和in都表示场所，但有区别。
at：在某地点（表示比较狭窄的场所）
at school 上学 at home 在家
at 2 Green street 在格林街2号
in：在某地（表示比较宽敞的场所）
in Beijing 在北京 in China 在中国
in the street 在街上
9. 如何表达某地有某人某物
There is/are+ 某人或某物+表示地点或时间的状语，这一句型相当于中文里“某地有某人（某物）”的意思，句中的be用is还是are取决于后面的名词是单数还是复数，是可数还是不可数。名词是单数或不可数用is，名词是复数就用are。如：
There is an eraser on the floor.
地上有块橡皮擦。
There is an old man under that tree.
那棵树下有位老大爷。
There’s some rice in the bag.
口袋里有些大米。
There are four pictures on the wall.
墙上有四幅画。
注：There is的缩写形式是There’s，There are的缩写形式是There’re。
△There be的疑问形式是将be放在there之前，句尾加问号。简略回答是Yes, there is / are. 或者No, there isn’t / aren’t。如：
“Are there any students on the playground ”
“Yes, there are. / No, there aren’t.”
“操场上有学生吗？”
“是的，有。／不，没有。”
△如果想知道有多少，可以用How many are there … 表示。
How many books are there on the desk There’re thirty.
桌子上有多少本书？30本。
10. 你会写为请求他人帮助找一些物品而留的便条吗
本单元写作内容为请求他人帮助找一些物品而留的便条。
Dear _______, （注意在英文中此处不用，（）用，）
首先，用礼貌的请求语句寻求帮助please … 或 Can you …？
说明你所需要的物品I need（需要）……
具体说明所需各项物品的位置。
Thanks ,
××（签名）
11. 设计自己理想的小天地，并描述它
美国家庭教育最大的特点是：从小尊重孩子，重视给孩子个人自主权，让孩子学会在社会允许的条件下自己做决定，独立解决自己遇到的问题。
英美国家的孩子，两三岁就住自己的房间了，父母只管孩子的安全，其它生活上的事，游玩、学习都由孩子自理、自主、自我选择。比如，从小就有自己存放衣服、玩具和学习用品的地方，自己收拾房间，整理、布置自己的“小天地”。
12. some，any的用法
I have some money in my pocket, but it is not enough. Do you have any
我口袋里有一些钱，但不够，你有钱吗？
△some，any可与单、复数可数名词和不可数名词连用。some一般用于肯定句中，any一般用于否定句、疑问句和条件句中。
（1）I have some science books. 我有一些科技书。（some在肯定句中译为一些）
（2）Is there any ink in the bottle Yes, there is some ink. 瓶子里有一些墨水吗？有。
在疑问句中，虽然一般不用some，但是当问句表示一种邀请或请求，或期待一个肯定的回答时仍用some。
（3）Will you have some tea 你喝茶吗？（表邀请）
【考题解析】
考题1：看图完成句子，一空一词。（看清物品的数量了吗？句首第一个字母要大写。）
（1） Where’s ________ ________
________ ________ the chair.
（2） Where ________ those ________
________ ________ ________ the TV.
（3） Where ________ the girl
________ is ________ the tree.
（4） ________ the Great Wall
________ ________ China （中国）.
解析：此题主要考查询问某物或某人在哪儿的句型：“Where is / are … ”及其回答。解题时要注意问句及答语的人称与数要前后一致。由图片和上栏的讲解可知答案如下：
（1）the / this / that / his / her （等），backpack, It’s behind
（2）are , books , They’re , next to
（3）is , She , under
（4）Where’s , It’s in
考题2：看图完成对话，一空一词。（in the wall与on the wall不同）
A： Are the pictures in the wall
B： No, (1) (2) the wall.
A： Are the plants under the teacher’s desk （讲台）
B： No, (3) (4) (5) the teacher’s desk.
A： Are the English words on the blackboard
B： Yes, (6) (7) .
A： (8) are the desks and chairs
B： (9) (10) the floor.
解析：此题主要考查当不确定某物在哪儿加以猜测时的提问及其回答，注意问答时前后人称与数要一致。由上栏的讲解和图片所示可知答案为：
（1）they’re；（2）on；（3）they’re；（4）next；（5）to；（6）they；（7）are；（8）Where；（9）They’re；（10）on
考题3：读一段独白。请根据文章内容找到下面的东西分别在图画中的位置，并将代表其位置的字母分别填入相应的圆圈中。
Look at the picture, please. You can see a backpack, a baseball, a pencil case, a plant and some keys and books. Where’s the backpack It’s under the table. And where are the books You see, they’re on the table.
The plant is next to the table. The pencil case is on the chair next to the table. Under the chair is a baseball.
Oh, what’s behind the chair They’re my keys.
解析：本题通过阅读的形式考查同学们是否灵活运用左边的介词表达物与物之间的空间关系。由文意与图示可知答案为：
C: backpack A. books B: plant E: pencil case D. baseball F: keys
考题4：看图完成对话。
A： What’s in the teacher’s room （老师的房间里有什么？）
B： There is a desk in it.
A： What’s on the desk
B： (1) (2) some books on it.
A： What’s under the desk
B： (3) a football under it.
A： What’s near the desk
B： (4) (5) two boxes.
A： What’s in the boxes
B： (6) . I don’t know.
解析：此题主要是考查there be句型的运用，关键是be和主语在单、复数形式上要保持一致。由图示和句意可知答案为：
（1）There；（2）are；（3）There’s；（4）There；（5）are；（6）Sorry
【模拟试题】（答题时间：80分钟）
I. 这只调皮的小猫在跟你捉迷藏，你能找到它吗？Where is the cat （16分）
1.
It’s _________ the box.
2.
It’s _________ the box.
3.
It’s _________ the box.
4.
It’s _________ the box.
5.
It’s _________ _________ the chair.
6.
It’s _________ the bed _________ the bookcase.
II. 选择填空。（20分）
1. Where _________ the CDs
A. is B. are C. am D. be
2. -- _________ my alarm clock -- _________ on the bed.
A. Where , It B. Where’s , It’s
C. Where are , They’re D. Where , It’s
3. _________ her hat on the dresser
A. Is B. Are C. Can D. Do
4. Please _________ the backpack here.
A. bring B. take C. need D. look
5. -- Are the CDs in the drawer -- _________
A. Yes, they aren’t. B. Yes, they are.
C. No, it isn’t. D. Yes, it is.
6. Her books _________ under the chair.
A. / B. are C. is D. an
7. Is the cat _________ the wall No, it isn’t. It’s _________ the door.
A. next to , under B. on , on
C. next to , behind D. in , behind
8. Your brother needs his notebook. Can you _________ it to him
A. take B. bring C. carry D. read
9. Here _________ your books.
A. is B. are C. has D. have
10. _________ a computer on my desk.
A. Have B. Has C. There is D. There are
11. Look _________ the map. It’s a map _________ China.
A. at , at B. at , of C. of , at D. to , of
12. -- Where is Changsha -- It’s in _________.
A. Beijing B. Hubei C. Hebei D. Hunan
13. -- Can you see a boy there -- No, _________.
A. I’m not B. I don’t C. I can’t D. I not can
14. -- Is your name Peter -- _________.
A. Yes, I am B. Yes, I’m
C. Yes, it is D. No, it is no
15. _________ alarm clock, _________ CD player and some CDs are on the desk in my room.
A. An , The B. An , a C. An , / D. A , the
III. 完形填空。（10分）
This is _____1_____ bedroom. It’s a nice room. You can see a bed, two _____2_____, a chair and a baseball on the floor. What _____3_____ see on the wall You can see _____4_____ and a kite on the wall. You can also （还） see a window _____5_____ wall. Where’s _____6_____ light （灯） It’s on _____7_____ table. Some plants are on the table, _____8_____. Where _____9 _____ his pencil-box and books They’re on the other （另一个） table. You can see a clock _____10_____ it. Under the chair is his baseball. It’s a nice bedroom.
1. A. Li Lei B. of Li Lei C. Li Lei’s D. of Li Lei’s
2. A. tables B. table C. tabels D. tabel
3. A. you can B. can you C. can D. you
4. A. the picture B. picture C. pictures D. of picture
5. A. in the B. in C. on the D. on
6. A. a B. the C. some D. an
7. A. one B. the one C. a D. the
8. A. to B. too C. and D. or
9. A. are B. is C. am D. do
10. A. in B. at C. under D. on
IV. 阅读理解。（10分）
Hello, everyone! This is my bedroom. That is my green bed. It’s very lovely. Isn’t it Can you see the pink pillow It’s my pillow. I like it very much. The dresser is beside the bed. It’s brown. And a clock is on the dresser. It’s pink and purple. Oh, this is my desk. It’s blue. There is a computer on the desk. I like to use the computer very much. I often use it to do my homework. My books are under the desk. The desk is beside the chair. My chair is blue, too. Ah, my baseball! It’s on my chair.
I like my bedroom very much!
（ ）1. Where is the dresser
A. Next to the bed. B. Behind the bed C. Near the desk.
（ ）2. Is the clock on the dresser
A. No, it isn’t. B. Yes, it is. C. I don’t know.
（ ）3. What color is the desk
A. Green. B. Red. C. Blue.
（ ）4. Where are the books
A. Under the desk. B. Behind the desk. C. Near the desk.
（ ）5. Is there a baseball in the room
A. No, there isn’t. B. Yes, there is. C. We don’t know.
V. 根据句意写单词。（14分）
1. The m______ book is on the dresser.
2. There is a video c______ behind the TV.
3. Please take these t______ to your bed.
4. Those are her CDs. T______ are on the chair.
5. W______ your photo It’s on the wall.
6. Thanks for your c______ games.
7. What’s on the desk There is an a ______ clock on it.
VI. 将问句和答语配对。（10分）
（ ）1. Are your keys under the sofa
（ ）2. Where is your hat
（ ）3. What’s under the bed
（ ）4. Is your ID card on the dresser
（ ）5. Where are your pencils
a. My baseball. b. Yes, they are.
c. No, it isn’t. d. They’re on the table.
e. It’s on the dresser.
VII. 重新排列以下句子的顺序，使它们组成一段通顺的对话。（8分）
A. Oh, yes, it is. It’s in the book. Thank you.
B. No, it isn’t.
C. That’s all right.
D. Excuse me, where’s my ruler Do you know
E. No, I can’t see it.
F. Is it in your math book
G. Oh, sorry, I don’t know. Is it in your pencil case
H. Is it in your desk
1. _________ 2. _________
3. _________ 4. _________
5. _________ 6. _________
7. _________ 8. _________
VIII. 写作园地。（12分）
画一画自己理想中的房间，并用英文写一篇60个词左右的小短文。
Unit 3 基础知识测试（答题时间：80分钟）
一. 归类记单词。
1. aunt 2. ten 3. Brown 4. black 5. pen
6. parents 7. Grace 8. green 9. white 10. daughter
11. White 12. pencil 13. nine 14. Jones 15. yellow
16. twenty 17. brother 18. sharpener 19. uncle 20. red
（1）名字：______________________________
（2）数字：______________________________
（3）颜色：______________________________
（4）文具：______________________________
（5）家庭成员：______________________________
二. 将下列名词变复数。
key
dictionary
watch
photo
brother
三. 用方框中的词填空，完成句子，有些词不只用一次。
1. Is this Jeff No, _________ isn’t.
2. Is Guo Peng your brother
Yes, _________ is.
3. -- Is this your sister
-- No, _________ isn’t. This is my friend.
4. _________ are his brothers.
5. This is Kate and _________ Lily.
6. -- Are these your parents
-- No, _________ aren’t.
7. Jim, _________ is Lucy. _________ is a new student.
8. -- What are _________ over there
-- They are boxes.
四. 根据汉语意思完成下列各句，每空一词。
1. 那是你的家庭照吗？
_________ that a photo _________ your _________
2. 那些是你的书吗？
_________ _________ your books
3. 这位是我的朋友。
_________ _________ my friend.
4. 这些是我的朋友们。
_________ _________ my friends.
5. 谢谢你的帮助。
Thanks _________ your help.
五. 单项选择。
1. This is __________.
A. a picture of family
B. a picture of my family
C. a family of my picture
2. -- Is she your aunt -- Yes, __________.
A. she’s B. her is C. she is
3. -- Are __________ coats yours -- Yes, they are.
A. they B. these C. this
4. Is that __________ uncle No, it isn’t.
A. he B. she C. her
5. __________ the great photo of your family.
A. thank for B. Thanks for C. Thank for
6. Are those your friends __________.
A. Yes, they’re B. No, they are C. Yes, they are
7. -- Excuse me, Lucy. Where __________ Lily, please
-- Lucy __________ here.
A. is , is B. am , is C. am , are
8. -- __________ -- Yes, I am.
A. What’s your name
B. Are you twelve
C. How do you do
9. -- Are you Lin Tao -- No, __________.
A. I’m not Lin Hai B. I am C. I’m not
10. -- Is that an __________ jeep -- Yes, it is.
A. my B. old C. your
11. Hello, Jim. __________ my sister Sue.
A. This is B. He is C. His name is
12. -- Is Mrs. Zhao a Japanese woman -- __________.
A. Yes, Mr. Zhao is B. Yes, he is C. No, she isn’t
13. -- Hello, Mike, is this __________ bird -- Yes, it is.
A. him B. your C. me
14. Mike and Tom __________ good __________.
A. are , friend B. are , brothers C. is , students
15. -- Dad, this is my pen friend, Tom.
-- __________
A. Thank you. B. OK. C. Nice to meet you! D. Good.
六. 连词成句（注意大小写和标点）
1. I，Jim，friends，are，good，and .
__________________________________
2. your，is cat，this，Lucy
__________________________________
3. the，great，your，photo，thanks，for，of，family .
__________________________________
4. them，love，much，very，I .
__________________________________
5. this，brother，is，Tony，my .
__________________________________
七. 阅读理解。
A
阅读Tom给笔友的信，判断下面的5句话是否正确。
（ ）1. Mary is Tom’s sister.
（ ）2. Jim is five years old.
（ ）3. Jim and Tom are in the same class.
（ ）4. Jim can speak Chinese.
（ ）5. Mary’s father works in a school.
B
This is my family. I’m married. My husband’s name is Peter. He’s thirty-six. We have two children -- a boy and a girl. Our little girl is six years old, and our little boy is four. Lydia goes to kindergarten, and Aaron goes to nursery school. My father lives with us. He is sixty. Grandpa is very happy to be with the kids. He loves playing with them and taking them to the park or the zoo.
八. 完型填空。
My name is Zhanghai. I’m twelve. This is my school. It’s No. 4 ____1____. I’m in ____2 ____ . In ____3____ class, we have 15 boys ____4____ 22 girls. The classroom is not new, but ____5____ clean. It has two doors and six windows. My ____6____ name is Gao Ping. She is kind to us students. I have a good ____7____, Mike. He is eleven. He is _____8_____. ____9____ in the same class. Mike has a sister. ____10____ name is Mary. She is five. She isn’t a student now.
（ ）1. A. middle School B. Middle school
C. middle school D. Middle School
（ ）2. A. Grade 1 , Class 3 B. grade 1 , Class 3
C. Class 3 , Grade 1 D. class 3 , grade 1
（ ）3. A. us B. our C. we D. ours
（ ）4. A. and B. or C. but D. of
（ ）5. A. it’s B. its C. it D. are
（ ）6. A. teacher B. friend C. class D. school
（ ）7. A. teacher B. friend C. class D. school
（ ）8. A. America B. boy C. American D. girl
（ ）9. A. We’re B. They’re C. I’m D. He’s
（ ）10. A. He’s B. She’s C. Her D. His
九. 书面表达。
根据图画内容，以My family为题，写一篇短文，词数50词左右。
【试题答案】
I.
1. behind 2. under 3. on 4. in
5. next to 6. between ... and ...
II.
1. B 2. B 3. A 4. A 5. B
6. B 7. C 8. A 9. B 10. C
11. B 12. D 13. C 14. C 15. B
III.
1. C 2. A 3. B 4. C 5. A
6. B 7. D 8. B 9. A 10. D
IV.
1. A 2. B 3. C 4. A 5. B
V.
1. math 2. cassette 3. things 4. They
5. Where’s 6. computer 7. alarm
VI.
1. b 2. e 3. a 4. c 5. d
VII.
1. D 2. G 3. B 4. H 5. E 6. F 7. A 8. C
VIII. 略
Unit 3 基础知识测试
一、1. 3 7 11 14 2. 2 13 16 3. 4 8 9 15 20 4. 5 12 18 5. 1 6 10 17 19
二、1. keys 2. dictionaries 3. watches 4.photos 5. brothers
三、1. it 2. he 3 it 4.These/Those 5 that’s 6. they 7. this She 8. those
四、1. Is, of , family 2, Are, those 3 This, is 4. These, are 5, for
五、1~5 BCBCB 6~10 CABCB 11~15 ACBBC
六、1. Jim and I are good friends.
2. Is this your cat, Lucy
3. Thanks for the great photo of your family.
4. I love them very much.
5.This is my brother , Tony.
七、A：F F F T T
B：Lydia, 4, 60, my husband, my son.
八、DCBAA ABCAC
九、参考答案：
Look！ This is my family photo. The youngest one in the middle is me.
These are my parents. The one on the left is my sister. The boy and the girl on the right are my cousins. I love my family.
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 1 页 共 17 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
Unit 3 This is my sister.
同学们，经过了一个月的学习生活，你们彼此之间一定熟悉了吧！也许你们已经开始互相介绍彼此的家人和朋友了吧！那么如何去介绍他（她）们呢？如何识别他们呢，本单元让我们一块来学习一下相关的用语和语法吧。
［教学过程］
一. 语言目标（Language Goals）
介绍人（Introduce people）
识别人（Identify people）
二. 语言功能
以家庭为话题，学会用英语介绍和辨认家庭成员及朋友。学习并记忆有关家庭成员称谓的英语词。
三. 重点句型
1. Is this / that… Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t. It’s … 2. This is my brother. That is （That’s）my sister. 3. These are his brothers. Those are my friends. 4. Is she / he your sister Yes, she / （he）is. / No, she / he isn’t. 5. Are they … Yes, they are. / No, they aren’t. 6. She is （She’s）/ He is （He’s）… They are… 7. Is Guo Peng your… Yes, he is. / No, he isn’t.
四. 主题词表
五. 目标语言
1. This is my brother.
2. These are my friends.
3. That’s my brother.
4. Those are my brothers.
5. －Is that your sister
－No, she isn’t.
6. Thanks for the photo of your family.
六. 口语交际：
1. 介绍他人：
This is … That is …
These are … Those are …
2. 识别他人
（1）－Is this / that Lisa / Mike…
－Yes, she / he is.
No, she / he isn’t.
（2）－Are these / those your friends…
－Yes, they are.
－No, they aren’t.
七. 重点词汇及短语
词组：
thanks for 为……而感谢 very much 非常
see you soon回头见 pen friend（penpal）笔友
family tree家谱
八.
1. 指示代词，this这，that那，these这些，those那些的用法。
2. 人称代词。
3. 名词的复数。
九. 疑难解析
1. 名词复数
本单元最重要的一个语法项目之一就是名词复数，名词又分为可数名词和不可数名词，可数名词有单、复数之分，表示一个人或事物的名词用单数，表示两个或两个以上人或事物的名词用复数，其构成方法、读音及例词语音列表如下：
情况 构成方法 读音 例词
一般情况 加-s 清辅音后读［s］浊辅音和元音后读［z］ map-maps[mps]cat-cats[kts]car-cars［ka:z］boy-boys［biz］tree-trees［tri:z］
以s, sh, ch,x结尾的词 加-es 读［iz］ bus-buses［］watch-watches[]box-boxes[]
以ce, se, ze, ge等结尾的词 加-s 读［iz］ licence-licences（执照）［］orange-oranges［iz］blouse-blouses[]
以辅音＋y结尾的词 变y为i再加-es 读［z］ baby-babies[]family-families[miliz]
特殊情况 不规则变化 man-men[men]woman-women[]Chinese-ChineseJapanese-Japanese
2. 介绍人和询问人
△在Unit 2中，我们学习了指示代词this / that用来指代物品，在本单元中，我们将学习指示代词指代人。当向别人介绍某人时，常用句型。
（1）This is … That is …用于介绍单个的人（见Starter Unit 2）。
（2）These are … Those are … 用于介绍两个或两个以上的人。如：These are my grandparents.
△this与that还可以用于打电话，（详解见Starter篇）。
△询问人时除了用指示代词this，that，these，those外，还可以用人称代词，如she, he, 但要注意答语。
Is this / that ...？的回答用it替代this 和that。
如Is this your sister Yes, it is.
当用人称代词询问人时，回答仍应用人称代词。
如：Is he your brother Yes, he is.
询问人物时还可用Who’s this / that 句型。回答时主语用it，也可仍用this或that。（详见Starter篇）如：
“Who’s this ”“It’s Diana.”“这位是谁？”“这位是黛安娜。”
“Who’s that boy ”“It’s Jack, my brother.”“那个男孩是谁？”“他是杰克，我的弟弟。”
3. these, those和they的用法
these这些，是this的复数，是指时间和空间离说话人较近的人或物；those（那些）是that的复数，指时间或空间上离说话人较远的人或物，通常构成以下句型：
These / Those are my / his / her bags.
这些/那些是我的/他的/她的书包。
What are these / those 这些/那些是什么？
They are books（They’re books）. 是书。
Are these / those maps 这/那些是地图吗？Yes, they are. 是的。
No, they aren’t. 不是的。
4. 人称代词
英语中有一类代替具体人名的词叫人称代词。它有一、二、三人称与单数、复数及性别之分（以后我们会了解到人称代词还有主格与宾格之分，在这里不做解释）
人称代词列表如下：
人称代词 I we you he she it they 作主
的主格 我 我们 你、你们 他 她 它 他们 语
（1）Who’s Kate 凯特是谁？
She’s my friend. 她是我的朋友。
注：she代替上文中的Kate，而不能再用Kate来重复回答：Kate is my friend.
（2）Li Lei is a boy. He’s twelve.
李雷是个男孩，他十二岁。
注：he代替前句中的李雷。
（3）Look at that bird. It is Polly.
看那只鸟，它是波利。
注：it代替前句中的that bird。
（4）Who’s it （门外有敲门声）谁呀？
It’s me. 是我。
人称代词与be动词的搭配
人称 完全形式 缩写形式 汉语意思
第一人称 I（单） I am = I’m 我是
we（复） we are = we’re 我们是
第二人称you you are = you’re 你（你们）是
he he is = he’s 他是
第三 she she is = she’s 她是
人称 it it is= it’s 它是
they they are = they’re 他们是
5. thanks for表示“对……表示感谢”
△thanks for与thank you一样，也是礼貌的用语，在接受别人的帮助，得到别人赞扬，表示谢意时使用。至于要感谢的内容，可以接在for的后面。如：
Thanks for the great photo of your family.
谢谢你家庭的精美相片。
句中great相当于good或nice，其含义是漂亮的“好的”。
Thanks for your help.
感谢你的帮助。
Thanks for the nice day.
感谢这个好天气。
△我们同样可以说Thanks for sth. / for doing... 或Many thanks for sth. / for doing...
Thank you very much for coming to my birthday party.
谢谢你来参加我的生日聚会。
6. family表示“家庭，全家人”
△family 与class（同学们）一样是集合名词，既可以看成单数，也可看成复数，要根据具体情况而定。指“一个家庭”时，视为一个整体，用作单数名词，谓语动词用单数，如：
My family is very large.
我家是个大家庭。
△family指全体家人时，意思是“家庭成员”，视为复数名词、谓语动词用复数，如：
His family are all happy.
他的家人都很高兴。
△family作家人讲时，不包括说话者本人，应说：
my family and I 我的家人和我
7. a photo of...一张……的照片
photo是“照片”的意思，picture也可以作“照片”解，所以可代替句中的photo。picture除作“照片”解还有“图画”“电影”等别的意思。photo的复数是直接加-s，构成photos。当我们说a photo / picture of ...时，of后面的人或物就是照片中的人或物。如：
a photo of my parents 一张我父母的照片
a photo of me 我的一张照片
8. Here is my family photo.
这是一张我们全家的照片。
这一句也可以说成Here is a photo of my family. Here is...可缩写成Here’s...，这是一个倒装句。指让对方看一个眼前或手头的东西，也可用于给对方一个手头的东西。这种情景中，常用句型Here’s...，这里Here一般不用别的词替换。如：
Here’s your English book.
你的英语书给你。
Here are pictures of our school.
这些是我们学校的照片。
9. parent和parents
parent（单数）单指父亲father或母亲mother
parents（复数）指双亲father and mother
例如：My parents love me very much.
我的父母很爱我。
10. See you.
表示“再见”，常用于两个人很快又会再见面的情景。类似的表达还有：See you soon. / See you later.
11. like 与love
△I love them very much.
我非常爱他们。
love和like的意思差不多，都有“喜爱”的意思，但指爱一个人时用love和用like在程度上不太一样。love在爱的程度上要超过like，like强调“喜欢”。在喜欢事物时两者区别不大。如：
I love my parents.
我爱我父母。
I like / love my little brother.
我喜欢/爱我小弟弟。
谚语：Love me, love my dog. 爱屋及乌。
12. very 与very much
△very much 是个固定短语，表示“非常”，常用来修饰一个表示人的情感的动词，在句中作状语。如：
Thank you very much.
非常感谢你。
I like it very much.
我非常喜欢这个东西。
△very是个副词，可修饰一个形容词或另一个副词，但不能修饰动词。如：
The picture is very good.
这幅画很好。
That’s a very good school.
那是所非常好的学校。
13. mother, father和dad, mum
mother、father用于正式场合，是子女对父母比较正式的称呼；dad、mum比较随便亲切，是口语化的表达方式，特别是孩子比较喜欢用。
14. home, house and family
这组词都有“家”的意思，但是含义上有所不同。
（1）home指家庭成员在一起生活的地方，如：家、家乡、本国；
home可用作副词，意思是：到家、回到家里、回国。Is he home yet 他已经回家了吗？
（2）house主要指建筑物、住宅
He stayed at his friend’s house.
他（暂时）住在朋友家里。
（3）family指家中成员或子女
Tom is the eldest of the family.
汤姆是子女中最大的一个。
15. 学口语，练交际
根据家庭相片介绍家人。
A: Is this your family
B: Yes, it is.
A: Is this your grandfather
B: Yes, it is. And this is my grandmother.
A: Are these your parents
B: Yes, they are.
A: Who’s that man
B: He is my uncle.
A: Is that woman your aunt
B: Yes, she is.
A: Is the girl your sister
B: No, she isn’t. She is my cousin.
16. family tree家谱
△制作family tree是英语国家的文化传统。我们来看看吉姆·格林，一个普通的美国男孩的family tree。
△wife妻子 husband丈夫 son儿子 daughter女儿 child（孩子单数）－－children（复数）
十. 试题解析
［考题］用所给词填空，一个词可反复使用。（注意分清远近，分辨these和those）
they those it that these
（1）A: Is ________ your brother
B: No, _______ isn’t. It’s my cousin.
（2）A: Are ______ your children over there （the children are not close to A）
B: Yes, ________ are.
（3）A: Are _______ your glasses （the glasses are close to A）
B: Yes, _________ are.
［解析］此题与上题有些类似，但主要考查的还是Are these / those…句型的运用以及与其单数句型的比较，由题意和上栏可知答案。
［答案］（1）that, it（2）those, they（3）these, they
［考题］用适当的人称代词填空。（前后两句人称与数保持一致）
（1）My name is Amy. ________ am Amy.
（2）Our names are Amy and Gina. ________ are Amy and Gina.
（3）His name is Tim. _______ is Tim.
（4）Her name is Alice. ______ is Alice.
（5）Their names are Tim and Alice. ________ are Tim and Alice.
（6）Your name is Li Peng. _______ are Li Peng.
（7）Your names are Li Peng and Li Lei.
_______ are Li Peng and Li Lei.
（8）Its name is Mimi . _________ is Mimi.
［解析］此题主要考查人称代词的用法并通过形容词性的物主代词的对比运用，以区分这两种代词用法上的区别，由上栏和题意可知答案。
［答案］（1）I（2）We（3）He（4）She（5）They（6）You（7）You（8）It
［考题］I like my cat ________. It’s _______ cute.
A. very much, very much
B. very much, very
C. very, very
［解析］句意：我非常喜欢我的猫，它很可爱。由句意可知，like应当与very much搭配表示“非常喜欢”之意，而very则修饰形容词cute，意为“很可爱”，故答案为B。
［答案］B
［考题］－Where’s my key to the bike, _______
－Oh. Is it in your backpack
A. mother B. father C. mum
［解析］句意：妈妈，我的钥匙在哪儿？哦，在你的背包里吗？由句意和上栏可知答案为C。
［答案］C
［考题］－Thanks ________ your help.
－That’s all right.
A. for B. in C. to
［解析］谢谢你的帮助，不用谢。此题主要考查固定结构thanks for的用法，故答案为A。
［考题］Her family _________ very large, and her family _______ all happy.
A. are, is B. is, are C. am, is
［解析］句意：她家是个大家庭，家人都非常快乐。此题主要考查family当“家庭”与“家人”讲的不同用法，由上栏和题意可知答案为B。
［考题］Is that a photo _________ an apple
A. in B. at C. of D. on
［解析］此题主要考查固定词组a photo / picture of...的用法，由上栏可知答案为C。
［考题］Look. Here _______ Kate and Ann.
A. be B. is C. are
［解析］此题主要考查“Here...”倒装句的用法，句意为：瞧，凯特和安在这儿，安和凯特相当于they，她们是复数，故答案为C。
［考题］His parents ________ teachers of English.
A. is B. are C. ’s D. ’re
［解析］由上栏可知，parent→parents. parent表示父亲或母亲，指一个人，复数形式才表示父母或双亲，故答案为B。
［答案］B
We live in a big ________. After school（放学后），my brother and I often go _______ together.
A. house, home
B. house, family
C. family, home
［解析］句意：我和我的家人住在一幢大房子里。每天放学后，我常常与弟弟一起回家。由题意与上栏要点6和14可知答案为A。
［答案］A
［考题］两人一组，进行对话，根据相片询问人物关系。
A: Are these your sisters
B: No, ________.
A: _____ they your friends
B: Yes, _______.
A: ______ those your brothers
B: No, ________.
A: ______ your friends
B: Yes, ________.
［解析］用these来指上面两个，询问这些是你的姐姐/妹妹吗？否定回答，不是。他们是你的朋友。肯定回答相同方法问下面两个，所以答案由此可知。
［答案］they aren’t; Are; they are; Are; they aren’t; Are they; they are
【模拟试题】（答题时间：90分钟）
I. 按要求写出单词（5分）
1. he（物主代词）_______ 2. her（主格）_______
3. don’t（完全形式）_______ 4. are not（缩写）_______
5. this（反义词）_______ 6. this（复数）_______
7. that（复数）_______ 8. parent（复数）_______
9. photo（复数）_______ 10. wife（对应词）_______
II. 用括号内所给代词的适当形式填空（5分）
1. ______ are the students in Class 3. ______ English teacher is Mr Green. （they）
2. ______ are a new student. ________ books are over there. （you）
3. ______is a Japanese boy. ______ name is Bill. （he）
4. This is Lucy. _______ is a girl. That is ______ desk. （her）
5. ______ is Mimi. _______ English name is Joy. （it）
III. 在（II）栏中找出（I）栏的答案（5分）
（I）
（ ）1. Is he at school today
（ ）2. Where is your teacher
（ ）3. Is Ann your friend
（ ）4. What’s your address
（ ）5. Are you in Grade Two
（ ）6. Can you spell it
（ ）7. What’s your name
（ ）8. Are these your pictures
（ ）9. Can I see your picture, please
（ ）10. What’s his phone number
（II）
A.Yes, she is.
B. It’s 8455971.
C. Sorry, I can’t.
D. No, he isn’t.
E. OK. Here you are.
F. My name is Kate.
G. He is at home.
H. It’s Fuxing Road, 100036, Beijing.
I. No, I’m not.
J. Yes, they are.
IV. 单项选择（10分）
（ ）1. －Are Jack and Mary your friends
－________.
A. Yes, they are B. They are
C. No, they not D. They aren’t
（ ）2. －What _______ these in English
－_____ pictures.
A. is, It’s B. is, Its
C. are, They’re D. are, These are
（ ）3. This is _______.
A. a school’s picture B. a picture of school’s
C. a school picture D. a picture of a school
（ ）4. ______ father looks young.
A. Mike and Bill B. Mike’s and Bill
C. Mike and Bill’s D. Mike’s and Bill’s
（ ）5. My family ________ all at home today.
A. is B. am C. are D. be
（ ）6. Sam Brown is my uncle. We call him ________.
A. Uncle Brown B. Brown Uncle
C. Uncle Sam D. Sam Uncle
（ ）7. They have _______.
A. two friends new B. new friends two
C. new two friends D. two new friends
（ ）8. Are ______ Gina’s ______
A. this, pencil case B. that, pencil case
C. these, pencil cases D. those, pencils cases
（ ）9. Thanks _________ your help.
A. for B. of
C. from D. to
（ ）10. －What are those
－_____.
A. They are my brother books
B. They are my brother’s books
C. Those are my brother’s book
D. It is my brother’s book
V. 从下列各组句子中选出表达正确的一个句子（5分）
（ ）1.
A. This are my sister.
B. This is my sisters.
C. This is my sister.
D. These is my sister.
（ ）2.
A. This isn’t me cousin.
B. This is me cousin.
C. This aren’t my cousin.
D. This isn’t my cousin.
（ ）3.
A. They is my brothers.
B. They are my brother.
C. They are my brothers.
D. These is my brothers.
（ ）4.
A. These is my mother.
B. This is my mother.
C. This is me mother.
D. This are my mother.
（ ）5.
A. Are this your grandmother
B. Is these your grandmother
C. Is these your grandfather
D. Is this your grandfather
VI. 按要求进行句型转换（10分）
1. This is my friend. （变为复数句）
________________________
2. Is that your baseball （变为复数句）
________________________
3. These computer are new. （变为单数句）
________________________
4. Are those dictionaries here （变为单数句）
________________________
5. It’s my backpack. （变为复数句）
________________________
6. These are his grandparents.（变为一般疑问句）
________________________
7. Those are photos. （就画线部分提问）
________________________
8. Are these school things （作否定回答）
________________________
9. The woman teacher is at school. （变为复数句）
________________________
10. This is a girl student.（变为复数句）
________________________
VII. 连词成句，请注意标点符号（5分）
1. your, is, sister, Lily, （？）
________________________
2. are, these, brothers, her, （？）
________________________
3. the, photos, all, look, at, （.）
________________________
4. photo, family, my, here, is, （.）
________________________
5. much, very, love, parents, my, I, （.）
________________________
VIII. 补全对话，每空一词（5分）
A: What’s that 1
B: He’s my father
A: 2 that woman
B: 3 my mother.
A: 4 that your sister
B: Yes, that’s right.
A: 5 her name
B: Cathy.
A: How do you 6 it
B: C-A-T-H-Y, Cathy.
A: 7 these her friends
B: No, 8 aren’t.
A: 9 10 they
B: They are my cousins.
1. _____ 2. _____ 3. _____ 4. _____ 5. _____
6. _____ 7. _____ 8. _____ 9. _____ 10. _____
IX. 完形填空（10分）
My name is Jack Hill. My Chinese teacher is Yang Bin. He 1 from Shanghai. He has 2 children, a son and a daughter. 3 are twins. The son is Yang Chen. The 4 is Yang Xi. Mr Yang and his son 5 in Nanjing, but his wife Chao Feng, a doctor, is 6 . Mr Yang’s daughter is in 7 . She is a college （大学）student. Yang Chen and I 8 the same college. We are classmates and we are good 9 . I teach （教）him English and he teaches me 10 .
（ ）1. A. be B. am C. is D. are
（ ）2. A. two B. three C. four D. five
（ ）3. A. These B. Those C. They D. Them
（ ）4. A. son B. daughter C. wife D. twins
（ ）5. A. be B. am C. is D. are
（ ）6. A. Shanghai B. from Shanghai
C. in Shanghai D. at Shanghai
（ ）7. A. English B. England C. an English D. an England
（ ）8. A. go to B. go C. goes D. are going
（ ）9. A. friend B. friends C. student D. students
（ ）10. A. China B. Chinese C. Japanese D. French
X. 读下面短文，画出家谱图（4分）
This is my friend John Wilson and his family. This is his grandfather. His name is Fritz. This is his grandmother. Her name is Evelyn. This is his mother. Her name is Anna. This is his father. His name is Earl. Earl’s parents are Fristz and Evelyn. These are his sisters, Christie and Carina.
1. ______2. ______3. ______4. ______
XI. 书面表达（6分）
写一段文字，介绍你家的主要成员及其职业。
My family
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
【试题答案】
I. 1. his 2. she 3. do not 4. aren’t
5. that 6. these 7. those 8. parents
9. photos 10. husband
II. 1. They, Their 2. You, Your 3. He, His
4. She, her 5. It, Its
III. 1－5 DGAHI 6－10 CFJEB
IV. 1. A（含be动词的一般疑问句的肯定回答。）
2. C（these指代复数，其代词主格中they。）
3. D（用of表示所有格。）
4. C（表示两者共有的名词所有格。）
5. C（family此处指代“家庭成员”，是复数含义。）
6. C（uncle表示称呼语时，其后可接名字。）
7. D（表示“两位新的朋友”。）
8. C（pencil cases复数形式与are, these相符。）
9. A（Thanks for sth. “因某事而表示感谢”。）
10. B（表示“它们是我哥哥的书”。）
V. 1－5 CDCBD
VI. 1. These are my friends.
2. Are those your baseballs
3. This computer is new.
4. Is that dictionary here
5. They’re my backpacks.
6. Are these his grandparents
7. What are those
8. No, they aren’t.
9. The women teachers are at school.
10. These are girl students.
VII. 1. Is Lily your sister 或Is your sister Lily
2. Are these her brothers
3. Look at all the photos.
4. Here is my family photo.
5. I love my parents very much.
VIII. 1－5 man, Who’s, She’s, Is, What’s
6－10 spell, Are, they, Who, are
IX. 1. C（主语是he, be动词为is。）
2. A（由下文a son and a daughter可知。）
3. C（指代a son and a daughter。）
4. B（由上文可知。）
5. D（主语是Mr Yang and his son.）
6. C（表示“在上海市”。）
7. B（in此处为表地点的介词，其后接地名。）
8. A（go to the same college上同一所大学。）
9. B（friends与classmates一致。）
10. B（由短文内容可以判断。）
X. 1. Fritz 2. Anna 3. Earl 4. Christie
XI. （One possible version）
My Family
This is my family. It has five people. They are my grandfather, grandmother, father, mother and me. My grandfather and grandmother are old. They do some housework at home. My father is a teacher. He teaches English. My mother is a doctor. I’m a student. I’m in my father’s class.
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 2 页 共 15 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
期中试卷
第二部分 笔试
I. 选择题。
（ ）11. What’s __________ name
A. you B. I C. she D. his
（ ）12. Her name is Ann Smith. Her family name is _________.
A. Smith B. Ann C. Ann Smith D. Smith Ann
（ ）13. -- What’s your phone number, Bob
-- _________ 87405387.
A. I am B. He is C. Its D. It’s
（ ）14. -- Is that your pencil
-- _________
A. Yes, it is. B. No, it is.
C. Yes, this is. D. No, this isn’t.
（ ）15. This is _________ eraser. It’s _________ beautiful eraser.
A. a , an B. a , a C. an , an D. an , a
（ ）16. This is _________ room.
A. my B. my a C. my an D. a my
（ ）17. His parents _________ teachers of English.
A. is B. are C. am D. is not
（ ）e and look at this photo _________ my class.
A. in B. at C. of D. on
（ ）19. _________ are his cousins.
A. This B. That C. It D. Those
（ ）20. The pencil sharpener is _________ to my notebook.
A. between B. next C. in D. behind
（ ）21. -- _________ is your brother
-- He is fine, thank you.
A. What B. Where C. When D. How
（ ）22. -- Well, let’s _________ computer games.
-- That sounds good.
A. play B. plays C. to play D. playing
（ ）23. _________ Tom have a baseball bat
A. Do B. Does C. Is D. Are
（ ）24. Miss Green _________ an English-Chinese dictionary.
A. is B. has C. have D. are
（ ）25. -- Do you _________ chicken
-- Yes, I _________.
A. likes , does B. likes , do
C. like , does D. like , do
II. 阅读理解。
（A）
This is my friend John Wilson and his family. This is his grandfather. His name is Peter. This is his grandmother. Her name is Mary. This is his mother. Her name is Anna. This is his father. His name is Tony. Tony’s parents are Peter and Mary. These are his sisters, Lily and Lucy.
读短文，填写家谱图。将A、B、C、D序号填写在横线上。
A. Lily B. Tony C. Anna D. Peter
（B）
English breakfast is a very big meal-eggs, tomatoes, tea, coffee ...
For many people, lunch is a quick meal. In cities there are a lot of sandwich shops. There office workers can buy bread-brown, white and all kinds of salad and meat or fish for lunch. School children can have a hot meal at school, but many just take a sandwich, a drink and some fruit from home.
“Tea” means two things. It is a drink and a meal! Some people have afternoon tea with sandwiches, cakes and a cup of tea.
They usually have the evening meal quite early, between 6:00 and 8:00, and often, all the family eat together.
On Sundays many families have a traditional lunch. They have chicken, pork ... with potatoes, vegetables ...
The Englishmen like food from other countries, too. People often get take-away meals — they buy the food outside and then take it home to eat.
根据短文内容，判断正误。正确的写“A”，错误的写“B”。
（ ）30. Many people in England have a quick breakfast and a big lunch.
（ ）31. Officer workers can get their lunch in the sandwich shops.
（ ）32. Many school students have lunch at home.
（ ）33. They don’t have chicken when they have afternoon tea.
（ ）34. They have the evening meal at about 9:00.
（ ）35. When they get a take-away meal, they take it home to eat.
（C）
Do you often play football Many people in the world like playing football. They often call British soccer football. But they are different games. Do you know the difference between them
A soccer ball is round （圆的）, but an American football is oval （椭圆的）, like an egg. Soccer teams have eleven players on the field. American football teams have forty players. But only eleven players are on the field at one time （每次）.
In a soccer team, the goal keeper tries to stop the ball from going into the goal （球门）. He is the only player to stop and pick up the ball with his hands. In American football, players can catch the ball with their hands. They can run with it and throw it to other players.
Both the British soccer and the American football are very interesting. They can make you fit and healthy.
（ ）36. What do many people call British soccer
A. Basketball. B. Football. C. Volleyball. D. Baseball.
（ ）37. An American football is like a/an _________.
A. pear B. banana C. strawberry D. egg
（ ）38. Do they have the same numbers of players on the field
A. Yes, they do. B. No, they don’t.
C. Yes, they are. D. No, they aren’t.
（ ）39. In which team can all the players catch the ball with their hands
A. American football team B. British soccer team
C. Both A and B D. Neither A nor B
（ ）40. Are the British soccer and the American football the same game
A. Yes, they are. B. No, they aren’t.
C. Yes, they do. D. We don’t know.
III. 完形填空。
A
Dear Amy,
How are you My name is Paul. I’m _____41_____ English student. This is my first letter _____42_____ English. For me, sports are _____43_____. I have a collection of sports things. I have six basket balls, three tennis rackets, nine volleyballs, four soccer balls, and five baseballs. I _____44_____ sports and I watch them _____45_____ TV. Do you play sports Do you have a sports collection
（ ）41. A. a B. an C. the D. /
（ ）42. A. in B. of C. for D. about
（ ）43. A. fun B. boring C. difficult D. terrible
（ ）44. A. plays B. do C. take D. play
（ ）45. A. through B. / C. on D. in
B
Hello, everyone. My name is Jenny and today I want to tell you about my new bedroom. This _____46_____ my new bedroom. The walls _____47_____ white, and _____48_____ floor is yellow. There is a big bed _____49_____ to the window. It’s orange and purple. The table is _____50_____ the bed and the wardrobe. There _____51_____ a computer and _____52_____ CD player on it. The bookcase is next to the door and my books are on it. I like _____53_____ very much, so the books are usually about sports. I like football and baseball. I _____54_____ three baseball _____55_____ in my home.
（ ）46. A. is B. are C. have D. has
（ ）47. A. is B. are C. all D. look
（ ）48. A. / B. the C. a D. on
（ ）49. A. / B. on C. in D. next
（ ）50. A. on B. under C. between D. next to
（ ）51. A. are B. is C. has D. be
（ ）52. A. a B. the C. an D. /
（ ）53. A. books B. sports C. reading D. the bookcase
（ ）54. A. have B. has C. bring D. take
（ ）55. A. bats B. balls C. / D. rackets
IV. 根据中文提示，补全句子，每空一词。
1. 请打电话685-6026找玛莉。
Please __________ Mary __________ 685-6026.
2. 谢谢你们精美的全家福。
__________ __________ the great photo of your family.
3. 我的钥匙在书包下面。
My keys __________ __________ the backpack.
4. 咱们打篮球吧！
__________ play __________.
5. 手表这个单词怎么拼写？
__________ do you __________ “watch”
V. 连词成句。
1. is，this，what，Chinese，in
_____________________________
2. you，can，some，bring，to，things，school
_____________________________
3. is，my，the，baseball，under，bed .
_____________________________.
4. ball，a，soccer，she，has .
_____________________________.
5. she，ice cream，doesn’t，like .
_____________________________.
VI. Writing 书面表达。
（A）根据图片及上下文提示，补全文段。
Eating well can help us keep healthy. John eats a lot of healthy food. For breakfast, he has milk, some bread, and ____1____. For lunch, he eats ____2____, some salad and fruits like ____3____. And ____4____ dinner, he has chicken, tomatoes, and ____5____.
（B）请先填写表格，然后根据表格所有内容介绍自己的各方面情况。（50—70词）
Name
Age
Familymembers
Telephonenumber
Food
Sports
【试题答案】
笔试
I.
11. D 12. A 13. D 14. A 15. D
16. A 17. B 18. C 19. D 20. B
21. D 22. A 23. B 24. B 25. D
II.
（A）
（B）30. B 31. A 32. B 33. A 34. B 35. A
（C）36. B 37. D 38. A 39. A 40. B
III.
（A）41. B 42. A 43. A 44. D 45. C
（B）46. A 47. B 48. B 49. D 50. C
51. B 52. A 53. B 54. A 55. A
IV.
1. call at
2. Thanks for
3. are under
4. Let’s basketball
5. How spell
V.
1. What is this in Chinese
2. Can you bring some things to school
3. My baseball is under the bed.
4. She has a soccer ball.
5. She doesn’t like ice cream.
VI.
（A）1. eggs 2. hamburgers 3. bananas
4. for 5. pears
（B）
Name ①
Age ②
Familymembers ③
Telephonenumber ④
Food ⑤ ⑥
Sports ⑦ ⑧
少一个要点扣1分，动词用错扣0.5分（每处），重复性错误按一个算，单词拼写错误2个扣0.5分，若只有一个拼错也扣0.5分。
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 6 页 共 6 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
Unit 8 When is your birthday
一 . 单元知识梳理：
二. 疑难解析
1. when引出的特殊疑问句
when是一个疑问副词，意为：什么时候，何时，引出一个特殊疑问句。when可以对年、月、日以及时刻进行提问或者询问某一动作发生的时间，回答时常用介词at, in, on等组成的表时间的介词短语。例如：
—When is your birthday
你的生日是什么时候？
—My birthday is / It’s July 16th.
我的生日是七月十六日。
—When do you go to school every day
你每天什么时候去上学？
—I go to school at 6：30 every day.
我每天6：30上学。
—When will your parents come to see you
你父母什么时候来看你？
—On Sunday.
星期天。
另外，除了when之外，还可用what time就时间进行提问，what time更强调“几点”。如：
—What time is it —It’s six o’clock.
现在几点钟？六点钟。
2. What year were you born
你出生于哪一年？
what year表示对年代提问，相当于疑问副词when，所以该句也可用when提问：When were you born 当然用what year提问强调是哪一年出生的。
be born出生。当我们说某人出生于某时或某地时，总是用一般过去时，即was / were born, was是am, is的过去式，were是are的过去式。例如：
—Where were you born
你出生于哪儿？
—I was born in Wuhan.
我出生于武汉。
—When was your sister born
你的妹妹是什么时候出生的？
—She was born on March 11th, 1990.
她出生于1990年3月11日。
3. 月份
我们一起来学习一下英语中十二个月份的写法。在实际使用中，月份通常可以用前三个字母来缩写，但一般情况下May, June, July没有缩写形式。
你注意到了吗？月份的头一个字母要大写。
4. birth与birthday
birth名词，出生、诞生，例如：the date of my birth 我的出生日期
birthday名词，生日，即the day of one’s birth某人出生的那一天。
当要祝别人生日快乐时常说，Happy birthday to you. 祝你生日快乐。
举办生日晚会可以说：
We had a birthday party on my eighteenth birthday.
在我18岁生日时，我们举办了一个生日晚会。
△a birthday present（gift）生日礼物
birthday cake生日蛋糕 birthday card生日卡
5. How old…？以及年龄表达法
（1）关于How的用法，以前我们学过How are you 问健康状况；How much is the shirt 问价格；How much / many还可以问数量。
—How is your sister
你妹妹身体好吗？
—She’s well.
她身体很好。
How much are the pants
这条裤子多少钱？
How many friends do you have
你有多少朋友？
（2）今天我们学习how old问年龄，how old意为“多大年龄，几岁”。
How old + be +主语？这一句型问年龄，其回答用“主语+be+数字”或者直接用一个数字就行了。例如：How old are you I’m eleven. /Eleven.
注：表示某人多少岁，数字后可以加years old，如果是一岁用year old。
6. 序数词
我们已学过普通数目，例如one、two、three等，叫基数词。如果把东西按次序排列，那么和这些数字相应，表次序的数字，叫做序数词。例如：第一、第二、第三……用来表示事物的顺序。
我们一起来观察下表，共同学习序数词的拼写规律及特殊情况。
first 1st twentieth［］ 20th
second 2nd twenty-first 21st
third 3rd thirtieth［］ 30th
fourth 4th thirty-ninth 39th
fifth［fifθ］ 5th fortieth 40th
sixth 6th fiftieth 50th
seventh 7th sixtieth 60th
eighth［eitθ］ 8th seventieth 70th
ninth［nainθ］ 9th eightieth 80th
tenth 10th ninetieth 90th
eleventh 11th hundredth［］ 100th
twelfth 12th one hundred and first 101st
（1）除了first（第一），second（第二），third（第三）有特殊形式外，其余都是在基数词后加th构成，但是有几个基数词加th时，须先部分改变原词的拼写形式，再加th：five, twelve将ve改为f，再加th；eight后只加h；nine要去掉e再加th，即ninth；ty结尾整十的词，是将y改为i加eth。
巧记序数词：
一、二、三须牢记，一般加“th”就可以。八少“t”，九去“e”；“ve”结尾五、十二先变“f”须仔细，“ty”结尾整数字，y变ie也容易。
（2）多位数的基数词变成序数词，只需将末位数词变成序数词，前边的数词不变。如：
twenty-onetwenty-first
ninety-fiveninety-fifth
one hundred and twentyone hundred and twentieth
（3）序数词的前面一般要带定冠词the。但序数词前面如果已经有物主代词my, your, his, her等，则不能再用定冠词the，如：
the first lesson第一课
my first teacher我们的启蒙老师
（4）英语序数词也可以用阿拉伯数字加上该序数词的最后两个字母来表示。如：
first1st second2nd
thirty—second32nd
（5）序数词前有时也可以用不定冠词a / an，这时已不表示在具体范围内的“第几”，而表示没有范围的，除以上数量外的“又一个，另一个”。如：
We’ll have to do it a third time.
我们要重做一次。（已做过两次）
They’ll have a second daughter soon.
不久，他们又将有一个女孩。（除前面一个外）
7. game的用法
game作名词，其含义很多，主要意思有：
（1）游戏、玩耍、娱乐、运动、比赛。如：
What a game!多好玩！
basketball game篮球比赛
computer game电脑游戏
play games玩游戏
（2）运动会：the Olympic Games奥林匹克运动会
8. 年、月、日、星期和日期
（1）询问星期几应说：What day is （it）today？回答用：It’s…，如：
—What day is（it）today
今天星期几？
—It’s Wednesday.
今天星期三。
（还可以说Today’s Wednesday）
（2）询问日期应说：What’s the date today？回答It’s…，如：
—What’s the date today
今天几号？
—It’s March 12th.
今天是三月十二日。
（3）日期表达法：
表达日期时应用序数词。如：
10月1日 October the first也可写成October 1st / October 1 / Oct. 1
如果要说“……年……月……日”时，英语中一般先说月，再说日，最后说年，写的时候“年”前加逗号。
We write： We say：
December 1st, December the first,
1994 nineteen ninety-four.
April 2nd, April the second,
1996 nineteen ninety-six.
9. 名词所有格
（1）在英语中，有些名词词尾加“’s”，这种形式称为名词所有格。它表示事物的所属关系。前一单元学过“Mason’s Clothing Store SALE”就是名词所有格。
①表示有生命的名词，其所有格一般在词尾加“’s”，如：Dave’s sister戴维的姐姐/妹妹。
②两个并列的名词同时修饰后面的名词，表示共同拥有，所有格形式（’s）表现在第二个名词上，如：Lily and Lucy’s father莉莉和露西的爸爸；表示分别拥有，则分别加’s，如：Kate’s and Joan’s beds凯特和琼各自的床。
③有生命的名词复数的所有格形式，只需要在词尾上方加“’s”或“’”。如：my classmates’ presents我的同学们的礼物。
（2）有些表示时间、距离、国家、城镇等的名词，也可以加“’s”构成所有格。如：three day’s work三天的工作。
（3）表示无生命的名词的所有关系时常用与of构成的短语来表示，位置在其所修饰的词之后。和of引导的短语结合使用。例如：
①He is a friend of Henry’s.
他是亨利的一个朋友。
②I have four books of Dickens’s.
我有四本狄更斯的书。
名词所有格的构成及读音：
10. each year每年
（1）此处each作形容词，意为“各自、每”。例如：
Each student can speak English.
每个学生都会说英语。
（2）each还可作代词，表“各、各自、每一个”的意思。当其作主语时，谓语动词用单数。如：
Each of us has a dictionary.
我们每个人都有一本字典。
（3）辨析：each和every
each表示一定数目中的每一个，个别意义较重，更强调个人或个别。例如：
Each one has his weakness.
每个人都有自己的缺点。
every表示数目不确定的许多人或物中的“每一个”，总合意义较重，表示“大家”。例如：
Every one is here.
大家都到了。
11. 时间前介词at / in / on的用法
（1）at表示在某一个具体时刻，在几点钟，在一日中的黎明、上午、半夜都用at。
at six o’clock在六点钟 at noon / night在正午/晚上
（2）in在某年、某月、某个季节，以及在一日中的早上、上午、下午都用in。
in2004在2004年
in January在一月份
in winter在冬季
in the morning / afternoon / evening在上午/下午/晚上
（3）on在某一天，以及特定某日中的上午/下午/晚上；
on Monday / May 1st在星期一/在五月一日；
on the morning of May 1st在五月一日的上午；
on a hot afternoon在一个炎热的下午
△如果时间词前面有next、last、this、every等修饰语时，不带介词，例如：
next Sunday下个星期天
last night昨天晚上
this morning今天上午
every afternoon每天上午
12. day和date
（1）day：
①泛指日子a day“一天”，“days”这些日子；
②day询问星期；
③day指节日Children’s Day；
④与night相对，指白天，day and night“日日夜夜”。
（2）date指具体的日期，即某年某月某日。
提问时date，询问“日期”。
13. have的用法
（1）“具有”：I have a happy family.我有个幸福的家。
（2）扩展用法：
①have+动词意义的名词=暂时的动作。
②吃、喝：Have some tea.
③从事、进行：
三. 考题解析
［考题1］情景反应
从II栏中找出与I栏中相对应的答语。
I
（1）When is your birthday
（2）When is Kate’s birthday
（3）When is Dale’s birthday
（4）How old are you
（5）What year were you born
II
A. I’m twelve.
B. I was born in 1991.
C. Her birthday is January 21st.
D. His birthday is May 5th.
E. My birthday is September 24th.
［解析］本题考查了when / how old / what year等引起的特殊疑问句及一般疑问句的问法和回答。
［回答］（1）E；（2）C；（3）D；（4）A；（5）B
［考题2］My brother ______________ born in 1980. And he _______ 24 years old.
A. was, was B. is, was
C. was, is D. is, is
［解析］“我的弟弟出生于1980年，他现在24岁。”出生于1980年用一般过去时was，现在24岁用is。
［答案］C
［考题3］根据释义写出单词：
（1）the fourth month of year ______________
（2）the eighth month of year ______________
（3）the twelfth month of year ______________
（4）the tenth month of year ______________
（5）the third month of year ______________
［解析］考查月份的写法。
［答案］（1）April；（2）August；（3）December；（4）October；（5）March
［考题4］—Happy birthday to you.
—____________.
A. The same to you B. Thank you
C. You’re welcome D. That’s OK
［解析］“祝你生日快乐”应回答“谢谢”。
［答案］B
［考题5］________________？She’s five.
A. What time is it
B. How many can you see
C. What about
D. How old is your sister
［解析］A项是问“几点钟”，B项是问“你能看见多少？”，C项“……怎么样？”结构不完全，D项“你的妹妹多大？”题目回答“她五岁”。
［答案］D
［考题6］给下列单词释义：
（1）September
the ___________ month of year
（2）May
the ___________ month of year
（3）December
the ___________ month of year
（4）February
the ___________ month of year
（5）August
the __________ month of year
（6）January
the __________ month of year
（7）November
the __________ month of year
（8）March
the __________ month of year
［解析］本题结合月份，考查序数词的用法。
［答案］（1）ninth；（2）fifth；（3）twelfth；（4）second；（5）eighth；（6）first；（7）eleventh；（8）third
［考题7］学语言、找规律。
阅读A、B、C，回答下面问题。
A. William Brow’s birthday is November 12th.
B. John Steward’s birthday is March 21st.
C. Leona Johnson’s birthday is June 3rd.
（1）问题：生日由月份+__________词构成。
（2）序数词构成有规律，不信你试试看，请写出下列序数词：
①第一_________ 第二_________
第三___________ 第五_________
第八___________ 第九_________
第十二_________
②第二十_________ 第三十_________
第四十_________ 第五十_________
第八十_________ 第九十_________
整十数的序数词由_________改为_________+_________构成。
③第十一_________ 第十三_________
第十七_________
其他数词的序数词由_________+_________构成。
［解析］本题重在发现和学习序数词的用法和规律。
［答案］（1）序数
（2）①first second third fifth eighth ninth twelfth
②twentieth thirtieth fortieth fiftieth eightieth ninetieth 整十数词, y, ie, th
③eleventh thirteenth seventeenth 基数词，th
［考题8］—Would you like _________ apple
—No, thanks.
A. a second B. the second
C. second D. a two
［解析］“你想要再吃一个苹果吗？”“不用了，谢谢！”表示已经吃了一个，又吃一个用a+序数词表示。
［答案］A
［考题9］___________？It’s May 1st.
A. When is your birthday
B. What day is it today
C. What time is it
D. How old are you today
［解析］A“你的生日是什么时候？”，B“今天星期几？”，C“现在几点钟？”，D“你今年多大？”。回答为“五月一日”，所以应该用A来提问。
［答案］A
［考题10］用英语写出表格中所示的日期。
（1）
________________________________________
（2）
________________________________________
（3）
________________________________________
（4）
________________________________________
（5）
________________________________________
［解析］日期用“月份+序数词”来表示。根据实际情况，大家可以自己做出回答。
［考题11］Say these dates：说下列日期：
January 12th, 1991 February 13th, 1992 March 22nd, 1992 April 23rd, 1993 July 27th, 1994 August 31st, 1995
What is the date today
［解析］本题练习日期的读法。
［答案］January the twelfth, nineteen ninety-one
February the thirteenth, nineteen ninety-two
March the twenty-second, nineteen ninety-two
April the twenty-third, nineteen ninety-three
July the twenty-seventh, nineteen ninety-four
August the thirty-first, nineteen ninety-five
［考题12］（1）When is ____________ birthday
A. your brother B. your brother’s
C. you’s brother’s D. you brother’s
（2）This is __________ room.
A. Kate’s and Lucy’s
B. Kate and Lucy
C. Kate’s and Lucy
D. Kate and Lucy’s
［解析］（1）要问“你的弟弟的生日是什么时候？”“你的”可用物主代词your表示，不能用you（你）或you’s表示。“弟弟的”，用名词所有格brother’s表示。
（2）“这是Kate和Lucy的房间”应用名词所有格，B不对。一个房间应属两人共有，所以只在后一个名词上加’s，而不应加在前一个名词上，或两个名词都加’s（分别所有）。
［答案］（1）B；（2）D
［考题13］（1）Each of the students ___________ English.
A. like B. likes C. don’t like
（2）__________boys in our class is tall.
A. Every B. Every of the
C. Each D. Each of the
［解析］（1）each作主语，of the students只是定语修饰each，所以谓语应用单数第三人称形式，肯定形式likes，否定形式用doesn’t like。
（2）“在我们班每个男生都很高。”Every可作定语修饰单数名词，each也可作定语修饰单数名词，但boys为复数，所以A、C不对。Every不可作主语用于of前，B不对，each可作主语，后可带of结构，且谓语用单数形式is。
［答案］（1）B；（2）D
［考题14］（1）I was born ___________ April 15th.
A. at B. in C. on D. from
（2）在下列时间短语前填上相应的介词，不填划“×”。
①_________________ September；
②_________________ September 1st；
③_________________ 2004；
④_________________ Spetember 1st, 2004；
⑤_________________ spring；
⑥_________________ the morning；
⑦_________________ this morning；
⑧_________________ the morning of September 1st；
⑨_________________ five thirty
⑩_________________ my birthday
［解析］（1）4月15日为一天，在某一天用介词on。
（2）根据左边的要点，综合分析。
［答案］（1）C
（2）①in；②on；③in；④on；⑤in；⑥in；⑦×；⑧on；⑨at；⑩on
［考题15］用date或day填空。
（1）New Year’s __________________
（2）What ___________ is it today Monday.
（3）We can see the sun（太阳）in the sky（天空）in the ___________ time.
（4）What’s the __________ today It’s Sept, 2nd.
［解析］由上栏的讲解可知答案为：
（1）Day；（2）day；（3）day；（4）date
［考题16］翻译：
（1）上英语课 （2）看一看
（3）举办生日晚会 （4）举行汉语比赛
（5）我有一台电脑 （6）吃早饭
［解析］考查have的用法，由上栏可知答案为：
（1）have an English class
（2）have a look
（3）have a birthday party
（4）have a Chinese contest
（5）I have a computer
（6）have breakfast
【模拟试题】（答题时间：90分钟）
Synchronous Test of Unit 8
测试时间：90分钟 满分：100分
I. 你喜欢节日吗？那么你一定知道下列节日会是在哪一天！用英语写出来。（24分）
1. New Year’s Day
_________________________________
2. Children’s Day
_________________________________
3. Women’s Day
_________________________________
4. Fools’ Day（愚人节）
_________________________________
5. National Day（国庆节）
_________________________________
6. Labour’s Day（劳动节）
_________________________________
7. Teachers’ Day
_________________________________
8. Army’s Day（建军节）
_________________________________
9. Christmas Day（圣诞节）
_________________________________
10. Mid-Autumn Day（中秋节）
_________________________________
11. Tree Planting Day（植树节）
_________________________________
12. All Soul’s Day（11.2）
_________________________________
II. 选择填空。（15分）
1. —____________ is your birthday
—It’s on July 10th.
A. Where B. When C. How D. What
2. —Is Julia’s birthday on May 1st
—Yes, _______________.
A. she B. it is C. he is D. she is
3. When is the school trip _________ March 3rd.
A. At B. On C. In D. It’s
4. —When is _______________ birthday
—His birthday is on 2nd.
A. Tony’s B. Kate’s C. Ann’s D. Gina’s
5. I have a basketball game ________ September.
A. at B. on C. in D. of
6. I like basketball ________ soccer.
A. or B. and C. but D. with
7. ___________ comes before December, but after October.
A. November B. September
C. August D. January
8. —When were you born
—I was born _____________.
A. in June three, 1989
B. on June the third, 1989
C. in June third, 1989
D. on June the three, 1989
9. Tom is a middle school student. How old is he ____________.
A. The thirteen B. Thirteenth
C. Thirty D. Thirteen
10. _____________ a Music Festival at your school
A. There is B. There has
C. Is there D. Are there
11. —_______ your father like pop music
—Yes, _______________.
A. Do, he do B. Does, he does
C. Do, he like D. Does, he likes
12. May is ________ month of the year.
A. fiveth B. fifth
C. the fiveth D. the fifth
13. What year _________ you born I ______________ born in 1991.
A. was, were B. were, was
C. are, am D. is, am
14. There are usually _________ days in February.
A. twenty - eight B. twenty - nine
C. thirty D. thirty - one
15. How old _________ your cousin brothers？
A. are B. am C. is D. were
III. 完形填空。（10分）
There are ___1___ people in my family, my father, my mother, my sister and I. My father ___2___ mother are teachers. My father ____3____ maths. My mother ___4___ maths. She is a teacher of English. They ___5___ hard. My sister is a worker. She ____6____ English at a night English. She goes to work early. She ____7____ lunch at home. She usually comes home from work at 5：30.
Today is my ___8___ birthday. Now we are sitting together. We are having our supper. There ___9___ fish, chicken and meat on the table. In the middle of the table there is a big cake. My sister is singing an English song“Happy birthday to you.”We are all very ___10____.
1. A. one B. two C. four D. five
2. A. with B. or C. but D. and
3. A. teach B. teaches C. learn D. learns
4. A. don’t teaches B. doesn’t teaches
C. doesn’t teach D. don’t teach
5. A. work B. study C. learn D. do
6. A. learn B. studies C. study D. talk
7. A. have B. has C. does D. study
8. A. mother B. mother’s C. mother’ D. mothers
9. A. are B. is C. has D. have
10. A. sad B. happy C. great D. well
IV.根据句子意思填单词。（10分）
1. We have a Chorus c_____ each year.
2. The last day of April is April the t______.
3. —Do you have a pop c_______
—Sorry, I don’t know.
4. September is the n_______ month of the year.
5. There is a speech c______ between Class 4 and Class 5.
V. 完成下列对话，一空一词。（10分）
A：Hello, Jane. Where are you going
B：Hello, Jenny. I’m going to Gina’s birthday ____1____.
A：Really ___2____ is her birthday
B：June thirty - first.
A：Oh. What year ___3___ she ___4___
B：In 1991.
A：OK. So she is thirteen ___5___ ___6___.
B：That’s ___7___.
A：OK. Please say ___8___ birthday to her for me. Have a ___9___ time at the party.
B：____10____. Bye!
A：Goodbye!
VI. 阅读理解。（共18分）
A
In Japan, there are many holidays and other great days. We can tell only a few here.
The fifth birthday of a boy is a great day in the family. The boy puts on a shirt like the one his father wears. It is an important moment in his life and means that he must now be a manly little boy like his father. He must smile when he has pain（疼痛）or trouble. He must carry on.
The day a girl becomes seven years old is a big day in the family. She may now wear a sash（腰带）like the one her mother wears. Her friends and her mother’s friends come and drink tea and eat cakes. It means that the girl must now be a womanly little girl and help in the home.
One of the great holidays in Japan is the Emperor’s（天皇）birthday. Instead of school, there are picnics, sports and speeches（演讲），as we have on our fourth of July in America.
注：
1. an important monent重要的时刻
2. means意味着
3. a manly little boy男子汉气概的小男孩
4. must carry on必须坚持
（ ）1. How many holidays and great days can you find in the story
A. Four. B. Three. C. Two.
（ ）2. When a boy begins to wear a shirt like the one his father wears, ___________.
A. he needn’t go to school
B. he isn’t boy
C. he must be a boy of strong character（品格）
（ ）3. Which birthday of a girl is a big day in her family
A. The fifth.
B. The sixth.
C. The seventh.
（ ）4. Japanese children don’t go to school on ___________.
A. their fifth birthdays
B. their Emperor’s birthday
C. their fifth and seventh birthdays
（ ）5. From the story, we can know the writer is from _________.
A. China B. America C. Japan
B
Jack：Sue! You wear a new coat! It’s nice!
Sue：Thank you, Jack. This is my birthday present.（礼物）
Jack：Oh! When is your birthday
Sue：It’s October 1st. It’s National Day, too.
Jack：It’s great! Who gave （给）this great present to you
Sue：My mother. I received（收）a lot of presents from my family.
Jack：I think you must be（一定）happy that day.
Sue：Of course, I enjoyed my birthday party very much.
（ ）1. What’s Sue’s birthday present
A. A new coat.
B. A new watch.
C. A new bike.
（ ）2. When is Sue’s birthday
A. Teachers’ Day.
B. New Year’s Day.
C. National Day.
（ ）3. Who gave this present to Sue
A. Her father.
B. Her brother.
C. Her mother.
（ ）4. Is Sue happy on her birthday
A. No, she isn’t.
B. Yes, she is.
C. She is happy.
VII. 写作园地。（13分）
这是Jim Green一家的全家福，请你用所学过的语言和图中所给的信息介绍这一家人。
【试题答案】
Synchronous Test of Unit 8
I. 1. January the first 2. June the first
3. March the eighth 4. April the first
5. October the first 6. May the first
7. September the tenth 8. August the first
9. December the twenty-fifth 10. August the fifteenth
11. March the twelfth 12. November the second
II. 1. B 根据答语，询问时间应用when。
2. B 指代上句中的birthday应用it。
3. B 在表示具体某一天的时间前应用on。
4. A 根据下句的his（他的）应为男性，故用Tony’s。
5. C September为没有具体到某一天的时间，故用介词in。
6. B 表示两个名词的并列用and。
7. A 十一月（November）在十二月（December）之前，十月份（October）之后。
8. B 具体到某一天的时间前用on，日期中“日”应用序数词。
9. D 回答年龄用基数词，前面不能用the。由句意是一位中学生，故不可能为三十（thirty）岁。
10. C “There be”句型中，一般疑问句be应置于there之前，a Music Festival为单数，故用is。
11. B 主语your father为第三人称单数，故用Does，回答时也用does回答。
12. D 序数词前一般要用定冠词the，“第五”的正确形式为fifth。
13. B “出生”发生在过去，故用一般过去时。are的过去式为were, am的过去式为was。
14. A 二月份通常只有二十八天。
15. A 主语brothers为复数，故用are。问现在的年龄不能用过去式。
III. 1. C 2. D 3. B 4. C 5. A
6. B 7. B 8. B 9. B 10. B
IV. 1. competition 2. thirtieth
3. concert 4. ninth
5. contest
V. 1. party 2. When 3. was
4. born 5. years 6. old
7. right 8. happy 9. good
10. Thanks
VI.
A
1. C 日本男孩5岁生日、女孩7岁生日、天皇生日。美国孩子4岁生日时举行成人仪式。
2. C 由…means that he must now be a manly…可知。
3. C 由第二段第一句可知。
4. B 由第三段第一句可知。
5. B 由文章最后一句可知。
B
1. A 2. C国庆节 3. C 4. B
VII. 略
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 1 页 共 18 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
Unit 9 Do you want to go to a movie
［教学内容］
一、语言目标 (Language Goal)
Find out and talk about the favorite kinds of movies.
找出并谈论最喜爱的电影种类。
二、语法结构（Structure）
want的用法
三、重点单词 （Key Words）
action movie action movies thriller
thrillers comedy comedies
documentary documentaries
funny great scary exciting
sad fun boring
扩展单词 Extended Words
romance/romances（浪漫片，言情片）
adventure/adventures（冒险片） useful（有用的）
tragedy/tragedies（悲剧） instructive（有教育意义的）
cartoon/cartoons（卡通片） musical/musicals（音乐片）
western/westerns（西部片） serial/serials（系列片）
newsreel/newsreels（新闻片）
四、重点短语（Key Phrases）
go to a movie seen an action movie
Beijing Opera on weekends
stay at home for the same reason
in a word a kind of kind of fun
go to movies with sb. 与某人一起去看电影
one’s favourite movie 某人最喜爱的电影
a great actor 一名了不起的演员
a successful action movie 一部成功的动作片
like …best 最喜欢……
in fact 事实上，实际上
be really fun 确实有趣
want to be an artist 想要当一名艺术家
look at pictures of Beijing Opera 看京剧画册
sleepless night 不眠之夜
learn a lot about … 了解许多有关……的知识（或情况）
exciting stories 刺激的小说（或故事）
for the same reason 由于同样的原因
soap opera/soap operas（肥皂剧）
detective film/detective films （侦探片）
五、重点句型（Key Sentence Structures）
A. Do you want to go to a movie
Yes, I do./No, I don’t.
Does he/she want to go to a movie
Yes, he/she does. No, he/she doesn’t.
B. What kind of movie do you like I like…
What kind of movie does he/she like He/She likes…
C. I like A and B. I like A but I don’t like B.
He/She likes A and B.
He/She likes A but he/she doesn’t like B.
六、疑难解析（Key Points）
1. want to do 想做某事
△want想、欲、愿（与wish同义）及物动词
want sth. 要某物。如：
She wants an apple. 她想要一个苹果。
表示想要做某事时，应说want to do，这里的to do是不定式短语，作want的宾语。例如：
I don’t want to play basketball.
我不想打篮球。
They want to see action movies.
他们想看动作片。
△want与like都是行为动词也叫实义动词，构成疑问句与否定句时，要用助动词do（详见Unit 6）。如果主语是三人称单数，谓语动词也要用三人称单数does。如：
Do you want to go to a movie
你想看电影吗？
Yes, I do./No, I don’t.
是的，我喜欢。/不，我不喜欢。
△want sb. to do sth. 想某人干某事。如：
I want you to help me. 我希望你能帮助我。
例题：
（1）I want __________ a movie.
A. to go B. go to
C. to go to D. go
（2）—Does Tom want to see a thriller
—Yes, __________.
A. we do B. I do C. he does D. they do
（3）My mother wants me __________ the English club.
A. to join B. join C. joins D. to joins
解析：（1）want后跟带to的不定式作宾语，go to a movie或go to the movies均表示“去看电影”。
（2）此题考查want构成的一般疑问句及其简单回答，主语Tom是第三人称单数。
（3）句意为妈妈要我参加英语俱乐部。此题考查want sb. to do sth. 的用法。
答案：（1）C （2）C （3）A
2. He likes documentaries and also likes Beijing Opera. 他喜欢记录片也喜欢京剧。
问：这个单元的后面还有一句Mike’s father likes it, too! 请问also和too有什么区别？
答：also与too都有“也”的意思。
一般来说also是比较正式的用语，它经常出现在句子中间，常见的位置是放在行为动词之前，系动词be之后；如果有助动词或情态动词，一般放在助动词或情态动词之后，表示强调的时候也出现在句末，例如：
His mother is also a teacher. 他的妈妈也是个教师。
He can also play baseball. 他也会打棒球。
Tom also draws at home. 汤姆也在家画画。
too是普通用词，多用于口语，常置于句末，与前面的句子用逗号隔开。例如：
I want to go there, too. 我也要去那里。
Linda is a student, too. 琳达也是个学生。
3. Some people don’t like it, but she thinks it is very interesting. 有些人不喜欢它，但她认为它很有趣。
问：连词but和and用法和意义上有什么区别？
答：but意为“但是”，是连词，用来连接具有转折关系的两个并列句，它的前面通常要有逗号。例如：
I like English, but I don’t like math. 我喜欢英语，但是我不喜欢数学。
This book is new, but it is not nice. 这本书虽然新，但是不漂亮。
and意为“和”，是连词，用来连接具有并列关系的前后两个成分，常用于肯定句中。例如：
He likes football, and I like football, too. 他喜欢足球，我也喜欢足球。
4. She thinks she can learn about Chinese history. 她认为她可以学到有关中国历史（的知识）。
问：about在作介词和副词时有什么特点？
答：about作介词用，意思是“关于，对于”。例如：
We are talking about the TV play. 我们正在讨论那个电视剧。
Mr Li asks something about you. 李先生问了一些关于你的事情。
它还可以表示“在……周围，在……边，在……各处”。例如：
I have no money about me. 我没带钱。
Jack walks about the park. 杰克在公园里逛。
about作副词用时，意为“大约，差不多”。例如：
There are about forty students in the classroom. 大约有40名学生在教室里。
It’s about that high. 它大约有那么高。
有时about可以表示“附近，周围，到处”。例如：
Is there anybody about 周围有人吗？
She looks about, but she can’t find her ruler.
她四处寻找，但是没有找到她的尺子。
5. She often goes to see Beijing Opera with her father. 她经常和爸爸一起去看京剧。
问：look, see, watch和read都可以表示“看”，它们之间有什么区别？
答：look 意为“看”，指有意识地、有目的地、仔细地看，主要强调“看”的动作。look是不及物动词，接宾语时需要加介词at。如：
Look at the blackboard, please. 请看黑板。
Please look at the picture on the wall. 请看墙上的那幅图画。
see为“看见”“看到”，着重指“看”的结果。不管有意识、还是无意识地看，结果都是看见、看到。“看电影”中的“看”可以用see来表示，一般不用于进行时态。如：
Let’s go and see a film. 我们去看场电影吧。
I can see a football under the bed. 我能看到床下有个足球。
watch意为“观看”、“注视”，常指较长时间集中注意力地观看，或注视正在运动中的人或事物。例如：“看电视”，“看比赛”中的“看”。
They are watching TV. 他们在看电视。
The students are watching basketball game. 学生们正在看篮球赛。
read意为“看”，通常指看文字类的东西，如：“看书”“看报”“看杂志”等。例如：
John is reading a book. 约翰在看书。
例题：用方框中词的正确形式填空完成句子，使句意完整。
look, look at, see, watch, read
（1）___________! The girl is playing the guitar.
（2）___________ the blackboard.
（3）Can you ___________ the bike under the tree
（4）My father often ___________ football match on TV.
（5）I’m ___________ newspaper every evening.
解析：（1）Look（用作不及物动词，唤起对方的注意。）
（2）Look at（及物动词强调动作，意为“注意看”。）
（3）see（及物动词强调结果，意为“看见、看到”。）
（4）watches（三人称单数，意为观看、注视，多指观看运动着的事物。）
（5）reading（现在分词，不能用see或look at。）
6. My favorite actor is Paul Jackson. 我最喜欢的演员是保罗·杰克森。
问：favorite有什么特殊意思和用法？
答：favorite意为“最喜欢的；最受欢迎的；最爱的”，本身就含有“最”的意思，没有比较等级，它可以作形容词使用，主要作定语。例如：
Who is your favorite teacher 谁是你们最喜欢的老师？
What is your favorite season 你最喜欢哪个季节？
favorite还可以作为名词使用，表示“特别喜爱的人或物”。例如：
These books are my favorite. 这些都是我最喜欢的书。
He is the favorite in our class. 他是我们班上最受欢迎的人。
例题：根据句意，选择括号中所给的词填空。
（1）My ___________ (like best/favorite) sport is tennis.
（2）I can learn ___________ (a lot of about/a lot about) Chinese history.
（3）I ___________ (too, also) read sad, funny, or exciting stories.
（4）___________ (In fact, On fact), Beijing Opera is ___________ (real/really) fun.
解析：（1）favorite （favorite是形容词，my favorite sport我最喜爱的体育运动，like best是动词与句意不符合。）
（2）a lot about（a lot of相当于形容词，不能单独使用。a lot相当于名词，可以单独使用，learn a lot了解了许多。about与名词搭配，about Chinese history有关中国历史。）
（3）also（此题考查too与also的区别，见上栏讲解。）
（4）In fact（事实上），really（real是形容词，really是副词。）
7. What kind of movies do you think they like 你认为他们喜欢什么类型的电影？
问：kind表示“种类”时有哪些特殊的用法？
答：kind表示“种类”，是它最基本的用法，可以和介词of搭配然后接名词。如：
a kind of book 一种书
different kinds of animals 不同种类的动物
all kinds of flowers 各种各样的花
the best kind of computers 最好的计算机
kind可以与what搭配，构成疑问句。例如：
What kind of man is he 他是哪种人？
提问“哪一种”或“哪一类”都可以套用这个句式。
What kind of＋n.... 句型也可用which来代替what。但which询问“哪一个”或“哪一些”时，表示选择。例如：
What apple do you want to eat 你想吃什么样的苹果？（没有给出选择对象）
Which kind of movies do you like best 你想看哪种影片？
Which kinds of movies do you like best 你喜欢看哪些种类的影片？
8. He often goes to see Beijing Opera on weekends. 他经常在周末去看京剧。
问：often和usually有什么区别？weekends的介词可以用at吗？
答：（1）often和usually都表示动作的频率。often意为“常常，时常”，着重指动作的发生次数，强调经常性。usually意为“通常”，含有“遵循常规、一贯如此”之意，表示习惯动作。例如：
What do you often do on Sundays 星期天你经常做什么？
We often clean our classroom after class. 我们经常课后打扫教室。
We usually read English in the morning. 我们通常早上读英语。
They usually play football in the afternoon. 他们通常在下午踢足球。
（2）on weekends意为“在周末”，也可以用介词at，通常指星期六、星期天。例如：
What do you usually do on weekends 你周末通常做什么？
Young people usually go to movies on weekends. 年轻人通常周末去看电影。
和on/at weekends相对应的词组是on/at weekdays，指从星期一到星期五的时间。例如：
We study at weekdays. 星期一到星期五我们学习。
We go to school at six on weekdays. 从星期一到星期五我们六点上学。
9. 关于时间状语的说法，先看例题
根据汉语提示翻译下列表示时间的短语
①I can’t go to your home ______________________ （这个星期天晚上）.
②She gets up very early ______________________（每天）.
③I’m thirteen ______________________（明年）.
④It was not cold ______________________（去年冬天）.
⑤______________________（这个星期）I have no homework.
⑥______________________（那一天）people wear new clothes.
听教练怎么说
1）当表示时间的词前有this，that时，其前面不用介词，例如：this (that) morning，this (that) week (month, year, term), this (that) spring (summer, autumn, winter)等。
2）当表示时间的词前有next时，其前面不用介词。例如：
next Sunday （Monday…Saturday）
next month（week, year, term）
next spring (summer, autumn, winter)
以上next的前面没有加冠词“the”，表示的时间是以现在为依据；如果next前加“the”，则表示的时间是以过去某一时间为依据。例如：
the next day, the next morning (afternoon, evening, night)
the next May (June, July…)
the next spring (summer, autumn, winter)
3）当表示时间的词前有last时，其前面不用介词。例如：
last Sunday （Monday …Saturday）
last week （month, year, term…）
last spring （summer, autumn, winter）
last January （February, March, April…）
last night
但是“昨天上午、下午和晚上”均不能用last，而应该说yesterday morning, yesterday afternoon, yesterday evening。
答案：①this Sunday evening
②every day
③next year
④last winter
⑤This week
⑥That day (On that day)
10. 让我们通过下面的习题再复习巩固本单元所学的知识。
①Do you want ___________ to a movie
A. go B. to go C. goes D. went
②I want to ___________ an action movie.
A. look B. hear C. watch D. see
③A foreigner can ___________ a lot about Chinese when seeing Chinese movies.
A. learns B. learn C. knows D. studies
④___________ what reason do you like China
A. In B. At C. On D. For
⑤What do you usually do ___________ weekends
A. on B. in C. into D. for
⑥Do you want to ___________ a movie star
A. is B. are C. am D. be
⑦I like comedies ___________ I don’t like action movies.
A. and B. or C. but D. so
⑧She ___________ think it’s interesting.
A. do B. / C. doesn’t D. don’t
⑨Kate likes Beijing Opera and her father likes it, ___________.
A. too B. also C. very D. two
【模拟试题】（答题时间：90分钟）
I. Match the words and expressions in column A with the words and expressions in column B. （从B栏中选出A栏词的英语释义。）
A B
_______ 1. action movie A. a kind of movie or play usually with a happy ending
_______ 2. comedy B. a love story
_______ 3. documentary C. a very scary movie
_______ 4. thriller D. a kind of movie which has a lot of facts, pictures or
recordings
_______ 5. romance E. a kind of movie with lots of actions
plete each word with the first letter given according to the meanings of the following sentences. （请根据句意，用所给的首字母补全单词。）
1. This c_________ is very funny. Children like seeing it very much.
2. How about the book It’s i_________.
3. Why do you like Beijing Opera B_________ they are exciting.
4. Tragedies are s_________. They are also called tearjerkers.
5. What do you think of d_________ They are boring.
6. What do you think of the story It’s s_________.
7. Sad m_________ make you cry.
8. A good action movie is e_________.
9. Arnold Schwarzenegger makes a _________ movies.
10. C_________ have happy endings.
III. 单选
1. Does he like movies Yes, he does. He likes _________.
A. thrillers B. documentary
C. tragedy D. cartoon
2. When is President Thomas Jefferson’s birthday His birthday is _________.
A. April 13th B. Oct. 3
C. March D. May 90th
3. The _________ letter in the alphabet（字母表）is “B”.
A. 2 B. 2rd C. secondth D. second
4. What is your sister’s favorite game _________ favorite game is volleyball.
A. Her B. She C. Hers D. My
5. Let’s play volleyball. _________
A. No, I don’t. B. That’s right!
C. That sounds great! D. Tennis is exciting.
6. I think this kind of movie is interesting, _________ my friends don’t like it.
A. but B. and C. so D. that
7. _________ she want to see a comedy
A. Does B. Do C. Is D. Are
8. —How is the action movie
—It’s _________.
A. exciting B. well C. like D. thriller
9. We often go shopping _________ weekends.
A. on B. in C. of D. to
10. Do you want _________ a movie
A. to go B. go to
C. to go to D. go
11. My sister doesn’t want _________ a thriller.
A. to see B. to look
C. to look at D. see
12. Her mother _________ action movies very much.
A. like B. don’t like
C. doesn’t likes D. likes
13. —Do they want to watch TV, Jenny
—Yes, _________.
A. they want B. they do
C. I do D. he does
14. _________ a word, Beijing Opera is my _________.
A. With, like B. With, favorite
C. In, favorite D. In, like
15. In our country, the national’s cultural（国粹） is _________.
A. Beijing Opera B. Documentary
C. plays D. comedies
16. —What kind of movies do you like
—_________.
A. It’s an English movie B. Action movies
C. Very interesting D. I like movies
17. This is _________ very exciting _________.
A. an; action movies B. a; action movie
C. a; action movies D. an; action movie
18. Does your sister _________ to a movie
A. wants to go B. want go
C. want to go D. wants go
19. Is the movie _________
A. interest B. interesting C. interested D. interests
20. _________ what reason do you like this movie
A. In B. At C. On D. For
21. —Where is the movie center—Hollywood
—_________.
A. In China B. In Australia
C. In America D. In Britain
22. My friends and I like science fictions（科幻电影）_________ they are true.
A. or B. but C. and D. because
23. _________ weekends, Sally often goes to movies _________ her friends.
A. On; in B. In; on
C. On; with D. In; at
24. I like to visit pyramids, the Nile… _________ I love Egypt very much.
A. In a word B. In word
C. In some word D. With word
25. —_________ your mother have earrings（耳环）
—No, she _________.
A. Do; don’t B. Do; doesn’t
C. Does; doesn’t D. Does; do
26. —What’s the date today
—_________.
A. It’s Sunday B. It’s sunny
C. It’s June 20 D. It’s going to rain
27. I like American movies _________ she likes Beijing Opera.
A. and B. or C. but D. then
28. —Does Maria like cartoon movies
—_________.
A. Yes, she likes it B. No, she doesn’t
C. She likes thrillers D. They are funny
29. —Do you like thriller
—No, I don’t. They’re _________.
A. funny B. sad C. exciting D. scary
30. —Do you want to see a movie
—_________. I must do my homework.
A. Sure B. OK C. Yes D. I’m sorry
IV. 句型变化
1. I want to see comedies. （对画线部分提问）
_________ kind of _________ do you want to see
2. I have a pencil. I don’t have an eraser. （将两个句子连成一个并列句）
I have a pencil _________ I don’t have an eraser.
3. 我认为恐怖片很吓人。
I _________ thriller is _________.
4. 《英雄》是一部很成功的影片。
Hero is a very _________ movie.
5. 我最喜欢英语。
I _________ English _________.
V. 单句改错，找出每句中的一处错误并改正
1. I want go to a movie with you.
2. She doesn’t like thrillers and documentaries.
3. I like thrillers and I don’t like romances.
4. He often goes to see Beijing Opera in weekends.
5. He like Chinese action movies very much.
VI. 按要求完成下列句子
1. She likes comedies. （变为一般疑问句）
______________________________________________________
2. I think you are right. （变为否定句）
______________________________________________________
3. My favorite movie star is Jackie Chan. （对画线部分提问）
______________________________________________________
4. Hero is on this evening. （对画线部分提问）
______________________________________________________
5. Don’t play here. She tells me. （合并成一句）
VII. 从方框内选出合适的句子完成对话
A. That’s great!B. Good evening!C. I want to go to a movie.D. An action movie.E. Let’s go.
A: Good evening!
B: ___1___
A: Are you free this evening
B: Why
A: ___2___ Would you like to go with me
B: What kind of movie is it
A: ___3___
B: Who stars（主演）it
A: Chow Yunfat（周润发）.
B: ___4___ Let’s go.
A: ___5___
VIII. 完形填空
A
___1___ weekends, I often go to movies ___2___ my friend, David. My ___3___ movie star is Jackie Chan. He’s a great ___4___. He has a new movie, Speed. It’s a very ___5___ action movie. I think it’s exciting. Jack likes Michele Yan（杨紫琼） ___6___. He likes her famous movie, Sleepless Night. It’s a thriller. I don’t think it’s great. ___7___, it’s boring. One thing is interesting. Jack ___8___ likes Bejing Opera. He often ___9___ me, “Beijing Opera is really ___10___! My father likes it too.” He even wants to be a Beijing Opera artist!
1. （ ）
A. At B. In C. On D. After
2. （ ）
A. with B. to C. without D. after
3. （ ）
A. like B. love C. liking D. favorite
4. （ ）
A. actress B. actor C. worker D. driver
5. （ ）
A. success B. successful C. successfully D. succeed
6. （ ）
A. better B. good C. best D. well
7. （ ）
A. In short B. In a word C. In fact D. In word
8. （ ）
A. too B. either C. neither D. also
9. （ ）
A. talks B. says C. tells D. speaks
10. （ ）
A. fun B. funny C. fine D. fact
IX. 用所给动词的适当形式填空
1. Sally __________ (like) to look at the pictures of Beijing Opera.
2. —How much __________ (be) your new pants
—They’re $ 20.
3. On Sunday she often __________ (go) to the movies with her son.
4. —Do you want to __________ (be) a popular star like Sun Yanzi
—Yes, I do.
5. —When __________ (be) your birthday
—It’s December 26.
6. —Does she like a thriller
—No, she __________ (do). It’s frightening and scary.
7. —__________ you like bananas
—Yes, I __________ (do). They are sweet.
8. —Where __________ (be) my backpack
—It’s over there.
9. —__________ you a teacher
—No, I __________ (be) not.
10. —What kind of movie __________ (do) Kate like
—A comedy.
X. 阅读理解
Zhang Huimei is a famous Chinese popular star. Young people call her A-Mei. She comes from the small town of Taidong, Taiwan. A-Mei has eight brothers and sisters. Her parents love her very much. A-Mei has a very beautiful（动听的）voice. When she was schoolgirl, she sang songs（唱歌）on TV. At last（最后）, she becomes a popular star. She works with another（又一个）popular star, Zhang Yusheng. The two sing songs together（一起）. It is a great success（成功）. Now all Chinese people know her and her beautiful voice.
1. Zhang Huimei is a __________.
A. movie star B. popular star C. great actress
2. A-Mei has __________ brothers and sister.
A. six B. seven C. eight
3. She works with another pop star __________.
A. Zhang Yu B. Zhang Yusheng C. Zhang Yimou
4. When she was __________, she sang songs on TV.
A. a child B. a school girl C. famous
5. Which of the following is NOT true
A. Her parents love her very much.
B. She has a good voice.
C. She isn’t popular in Taiwan.
XI. 写作
根据提示，介绍你和你的朋友对电影的喜好及原因（不少于四句话）
Name Kinds ofMovies Like OrDislike Reason
You Action movies √ Exciting
Thrillers × Scary
Your Friend Comedies √ Funny
Jeff Documentaries × Boring
1. ________________________________________________________________________
2. ________________________________________________________________________
3. ________________________________________________________________________
4. ________________________________________________________________________
【试题答案】
I. 1. E 2. A 3. D 4. C 5. B
II. 1. comedy 2. interesting 3. Because 4. sad 5. documentary
6. scary / sad 7. movies 8. exciting 9. action edies
III. 1. A 2.C 3. D 4. A 5. C 6. A 7. A 8. A 9. A 10. C
11. A 12 . D 13. C 14. C 15. A 16. B 17. B 18. B 19. B 20. D
21. C 22. B 23. C 24. A 25. C 26. C 27. C 28. B 29. D 30. D
IV. 1. What, movies 2. but 3. think, scary 4. successful 5. like, best
V. 1. want 后加to 2. and 改成or 3. and改成but 4. in 改成on/at 5. like 改成likes
VI. 1. Does she like comedies
2. I don't think you are right.
3. Who is your favorite movie star
4. Which movie is on this evening
5. She tells me not to play there.
VII. 1. B 2. C 3. D 4. A 5. E
VIII. 1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. B 6. C 7. C 8. D 9. C 10. C
IX. 1. likes 2. are 3. goes 4. be 5. is 6. doesn't 7. Do, do 8. is 9. Are, am 10. does
X. 1. B 2. C 3. B 4. B 5. C
XI. Possible Keys:
1. I like action movies because they're exciting.
2. But I don't like thrillers because they're so scary.
3. My friend Jeff likes comedies best. He thinks they're funny.
4. But he doesn't like documentaries. He thinks they're boring.
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 1 页 共 13 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
Unit 7. How much are these pants
一. Language Goals（语言目标）
1. Shopping（购物）
2. Talk about clothing（谈论服装）
3. Thank someone（感谢某人）
二. Structures（结构）
1. How much questions
2. numbers（数字）
三. Target language（目标语言）
1. How much is the red sweater It’s eight dollars.
这件红毛衣多少钱？它是8美元。
2. How much are these black pants They are ten dollars.
这条黑裤子多少钱？它是10美元。
3. Can I help you
你要买什么？（在商店里）
4. I want a sweater.
我要买件毛衣。
5. Here you are.
给你。
6. I’ll take it.
我要买它。
7. --- Thank you. 谢谢。
---- You’re welcome.不客气！
8. We sell pants for only ￥30.
我们卖的裤子仅售30元。
四. Key points（难点解析）
1. How much are these pants 裤子多少钱一条？
问：本句中的how much是什么样的疑问词，有什么特殊用法？它和how many用法有什么区别？
答：句中的how much意为“多少钱”，用来询问价格。
（2）若询问某一商品多少钱时，一般用how much is/ are... 这一句型。商品是单数或不可数名词时，用is；商品是复数名词时，用are。例如：
---- How much is that coat 那件大衣多少钱？
---- One hundred and twenty yuan. 120元。
---- How much are these apples 这些苹果多少钱？
---- They are twenty-five yuan. 25元。
（2）询问商品价格时，还可以用：
How much, please 请问多少钱？
How much do you want for it 这东西你要多少钱？
How much do you say it is 你说要多少钱？
What’s the price of that coat 那件外套多少钱？
（3）how much还可以用来修饰不可数名词，与之相对应的how many则修饰可数名词复数，对物体的数量提问。例如：
---- I want some chicken. 我要一些鸡肉。
---- How much do you want 你想要多少？
---- How many oranges do you want 你要多少橘子？
--- Ten, please. 十个。
how much和how many的区别很大，主要从以下几个方面可以看出：
（2）how many是用来询问数量多少的疑问词，后接可数名词复数，回答时可简单说出数字。many可以用作形容词、名词和代词，它可以用来修饰可数名词复数或代替可数名词复数。例如：
---- How many birds are there in the tree 树上有几只鸟？
--- Seven. 七只。
---- How many apples are there on the table 桌子上有几个苹果？
---- Five. 五个。
（2）much也可用作形容词、名词和代词，但它用来修饰或代替不可数名词，谓语动词用单数。how much也可以翻译成“多少”，后面总是跟不可数名词。例如：
How much water is there in the glass 杯里有多少水？
How much money do you have 你有多少钱？
eg. 1. ---- How much is your sweater
---- __________ .
A. 5 dollar B. 5 $ C. 5 yuan D. 5 ￥
2. How much ___________ trousers
A. is this B. are this C. are these D. is the
3. A: _______ are the apples
B: Two yuan a kilo. ________ do you want
A: Three kilos.
A. How much How much B. How much, How many
C. How many, How many D. How many, How much
注：many和much
名词除了能被数词修饰外，还可以被many，much等词修饰，见下表
［警示］
（1）how much与how many在这儿是询问数量。
（2）询问价格不能用how many。
翻译：
（1）许多毛衣__________________
（2）许多牛奶__________________
（3）多少T恤衫__________________
（4）多少花椰菜__________________
［答案］（1）many/ lots of/ a lot of sweaters（many只能修饰可数名词，lots of/ a lot of既能修饰可数名词，也能修饰不可数名词。）
（2）much/ a lot of/ lots of milk
（3）how many T-shirts（how many与many一样修饰可数名词的复数。）
（4）how much broccoli（broccoli是不可数名词。）
2. Can I help you 要帮忙吗？（或你要买什么？）
问：这个句子中的help有哪些重要用法？
答：help既可以用作名词也可以用作动词。
（1）用作动词，是及物动词，意为“帮助；援助”。常构成的结构是，help sb（to）do sth或者help sb with sth。例如：
Can you help me（to）study my English ＝Can you help me with my English
你能帮我学习英语吗？
Can you help the kids with their homework
你能帮孩子们做作业吗？
（2）用作名词。例如：
Thank you for your help.谢谢你的帮助。
I need your help. Please help me.我需要你的帮助，请帮帮我。
3. 学习购物用语
（1）售货员常用语
Can I help you 你想买什么？
What can I do for you 你想买什么？
What color do you want 你要什么颜色的？
Which one do you want 你想要哪一个？
Which do you like better 你更喜欢哪一个？
Here you are. 给你。
It is ten yuan. 它的价格是十元。
They’re $ 20. 它们的价格是二十美元。
You’re welcome. 不客气。
（2）顾客常用语
I want.... 我想买……
I would like.... 我想买……
How much is it 什么价格？
How much are they 什么价格？
It is very cheap. 它很便宜。
They are very dear（expensive）. 它们很贵。
I’m sorry I can’t afford it. 对不起，我付不起钱。
I’ll take it. 我买下它。
Thanks a lot! / Thank you very much. 非常感谢。
4. I’ll take it. 我要了。
I’ll是I will的缩写形式，will是助动词，用来表示一般将来时。如：
I’ll go home with you. 我将和你一起回家。
△take相当于buy，是“买下”的意思。当选定商品，决定购买时，常说I’ll take it。通常不用I’ll buy it。
You’re welcome. 不客气。
用来回答别人的致谢。
回答别人致谢的用语还有：That’s all right. / That’s OK. / Not at all. / With pleasure. / It’s a pleasure.等。如：
----- Thanks for your help. 感谢您帮助我。
---- You’re welcome. 不用谢。
5. Here you are. 给你。
问：here you are不是按字面意思理解的，它主要用于哪些场合？
答：here are you这个句子口语交际功能很强，主要用于以下几个方面：
（1）当别人向你要东西或借东西，你把东西递给别人时常说：
Here you are. 意思是“给你”。如：
---- Can I have a look at your picture 我能看看你的画吗？
--- OK. Here you are. 可以，给你。
---- Can I borrow your eraser 我能借用一下你的橡皮擦吗？
---- Yes, here you are. 可以，给你。
（2）Here it is. 也可以理解为“给你”，可它有复数形式，如Here they are. 当别人问你要或借东西时，你表示同意，你可以使用这句话。例如：
---- Excuse me, can I use your pen 劳驾，我能用一下你的钢笔吗？
---- Certainly. Here it is. 当然可以，给你。
值得我们注意的是Here it is. 在不少情况下可与Here you are.通用。但应注意，当指复数名词时，Here you are不可与Here it is换用。
在不同的情景下或不同上下文中，对这种表达往往有不同的理解。如果汽车到站了，售票员对你说Here you are.，意思是“你到站了”。如果对方在寻找一枝钢笔，你帮他找到了，便说Here it is.意即“你的笔在这儿”。拿起来递给对方时说Here you are.如果是他自己找到的，他可能会说Here it is.，意思是“终于找到了”。如果在商店买东西，营业员对你说Here you are.意思则是“这就是你所需要的东西”。如果几个人到达了一个地方，其中一个人说Here we are.，意思是“我们到了”。
6. socks短袜。
socks是以“双”来谈论的，因此常以复数形式出现。socks作主语时，谓语动词用复数形式；如果是this pair of shoes作主语，则谓语动词用单数。
类似socks的词有：pants（裤子，多用于美语），trousers（裤子，长裤，多用于英国英语），shorts（短裤），shoes（鞋子），compasses（圆规），chopsticks（筷子），gloves（手套）等。如：
--- Where are my socks 我的短袜在哪儿呢？
--- One is here and the other is under the bed. 一只在这儿，另一只在床下。
This pair of shoes is $ 23. 这双鞋23美元。
His trousers are blue. 他的裤子是蓝色的。
例. 根据图片和语意填空完成句子，一空一词。
（1）My _____ ______ white.
（2）This pair of _____ ______ small.
（3）The _______ ______ 20 dollars.
（4）Your _______ _______ under the bed.
［解析］成双成对的物品，用复数形式出现，图中的物品都要用复数，而且英语中主语的人称与数必须一致，除了第（2）句的主语this pair（这条）是单数外，其余三句的主语均为复数，谓语动词用复数are。这四个句子的句意为：（1）我的袜子是白色的。（2）这条短裤小。（3）这条长裤20美元。（4）你的鞋在床下。
［答案］（1）socks are（2）shorts is（3）pants are（4）shoes are
7. 常见货币
［警示］dollar, pound, france均有单复形式，人民币元没有复数形式。
从B栏选出与A栏相匹配的汉语（连线）
［解析］由上栏表格可知答案为：一百元：100 yuan/ ￥100，一百英镑100 pounds/ ￡100，一百美元：100 dollars/ $ 100，一百法郎：100 frances/ FF 100。
8. 完形填空
A: Good morning! 1 I help you
B: I’d like some oranges, please!
A: 2 3 do you want
B: Two kilos（公斤）.
A: OK. 4 you are. 5 that 6
B: No. Do you 7 any apples here
A: Yes. How many do you want
B: One kilo. 8 9 are these things
A: Forty yuan, please.
B: Here’s the money. Thank you.
A: You’re 10 .
（ ）1. A. Do B. Can C. Am
（ ）2. A. How B. What C. Which
（ ）3. A. many B. much C. any
（ ）4. A. There B. Have C. Here
（ ）5. A. Is B. Am C. Are
（ ）6. A. one B. all C. some
（ ）7. A. want B. there C. have
（ ）8. A. Where B. How C. What
（ ）9. A. some B. any C. much
（ ）10. A. all right B. welcome C. OK
［解析］A是售货员，B是顾客，这是一段购买水果的对话，Is that all？意为：就要这些吗？Here’s the money.给你钱。
［答案］（1）B（2）A（3）A（how many oranges）（4）C（5）A（6）B（7）C（8）B（9）C（10）B
9. sale出售，卖。
（1）sale是名词，表示“出售，卖出”的意思。
have a sale进行销售活动
on sale出售的
on sale for...以……价格出售
（2）sale的动词是sell“卖出”。
（3）sell后面可接双宾语，sell sb. sth.或sell sth. to sb.把东西卖给某人。
如：Many things are on sale in the shop.
这家商店有很多东西出售。
That hat is on sale for $ 8.
那顶帽子售价8美元。
He sells the house to his friend.
他把这个房子卖给一位朋友了。
10. 小结本课中for的用法
（1）for：表示“等价交换”。如：Socks in all colors for ￥2.
各色短袜每双2元。
（2）for：适合于。如：bags for school or sports
（3）为了，对于……而言
for boys对男孩而言
buy a book for me为我买一本书
（4）for yourself“表示亲自”
［拓展］yourself你自己，是反身代词。
11. We have sweaters at a very good price ––– only ￥25!
我们有价格合适的毛衣出售，每件只需25元。
at a very good price表示“以一个很合适的价格出售”。
at the price of....意思是“以……价格出售”。
price是名词，意思是“价格”。
询问“价格多少”也可以用what。
如：--- What’s the price of the coat 这件外衣多少钱？
---- It’s 80 yuan. 80元。
This store has great bags at the price of $ 10 each.
这家商店有大提包，售价每个十美元。
注：in与at在本单元中的用法
in：sweaters in all colors各色毛衣
at：表示价格
at ￥50 each 每件50元
at a very good price 以一个很合理的价格出售
at the price of 以……价格出售
12. have a look，look和see的辨析
（1）have a look at看一看
have a look at＝look at（及物）
同义：take a look at
（2）［拓展］look at与look，look与see
look不及物，look at及物（带宾语），强调“看的”动作。
see：及物动词，强调看的结果。
例：用介词for，in，at填空。
（1）___________ lunch, I like hamburgers and salad.
（2）Do you need bags ___________ sports
（3）We have bags ___________ all colors ___________ 20 dollars.
（4）Can I have look ___________ these blue socks
（5）This basketball is ___________ sale ___________ only $ 6.
（6）What can I do ___________ you
［答案］介词的用法很灵活，学好介词是件很不容易的事。由上栏讲解可知答案为：（1）For对……而言，句首用For（2）for适合于，供……用（3）in（各色）at以……价格（4）at，固定搭配，动词短语：have a look at相当于look at（5）on，for on sale for...以……价格出售（固定结构）（6）for为（表目的）。
13. 如何学习基数词？
数词分为基数词和序数词。表示数字多少的词叫基数词，如one，two，three，four等。表示顺序的词叫序数词，如first，second，third等。100以下的基数词构成如下：
（1）基数词0－12
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
zero one two three four five six seven eight
9 10 11 12
nine ten eleven twelve
（2）基数词13－19均以后缀-teen结尾
13 14 15 16
thirteen fourteen fifteen sixteen
17 18 19
seventeen eighteen nineteen
注：13、15、18重点记忆：three–––thirteen，five ––– fifteen，eight ––– eighteen
（3）表示“几十”的基数词中20－90均以后缀-ty结尾
20 30 40 50 60 70
twenty thirty forty fifty sixty seventy
80 90
eighty ninety
注：eight ––– eighty
（4）表示“几十几”的基数词，十位数与个位数之间用连字符“-”
22 31 48 59 65 99
twenty-two thirty-one forty-eight fifty-nine sixty-five ninety-nine
英语中的数字看似复杂，其实是有规律可循的，只要抓住这些规律，就能很轻松、快速地掌握这些词汇了。
1）0～12这十三个数字要单独记忆，它们分别是：zero, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, eleven, twelve。
2）13～19都是以“个位数字＋teen”构成，并且重音都在teen上。同时，我们还要注意thirteen（13），fifteen（15），eighteen（18）这三个数字的拼写。
3）20，30……90都是以“个位数字＋ty”构成，但应注意twenty（20），thirty（30），forty（40），fifty（50），eighty（80）的特殊性。
4）20以上两位数的基数词，十位数与个位数之间用符号“-”连接。如：thirty-two（32），forty-four（44），fifty-five（55）等。
5）表示“百”用hundred，且不论其数目是多少，一律用单数形式。同时，100以上的数字，在百位和十位或个位（十位为零时）之间加and。如：one hundred and five（105），one hundred and twenty-three（123）。
例：用英文数字填空。
（1）The shirt is __________ dollars.
（2）The pants are __________ dollars.
（3）The socks are __________ dollars.
（4）The shorts are __________ dollars.
（5）The computer game is __________ dollars.
（6）The choocolate is __________ dollars.
（7）The salted peanuts are __________ dollars.
（8）The gun is __________ dollars.
（9）The puzzle is __________ dollars.
［答案］
（1）eighty-two（2）one hundred（3）thirty-three（4）seventy-eight（5）ninety-seven（6）forty-four（7）fifteen（8）fifty-nine（9）twenty-five
e and buy your clothes at Huaxing’s great sale! 到华兴大甩卖来买衣服吧！
问：clothes本身就是复数形式吗，它可以用什么词来修饰？sale这个单词怎么使用？
答：clothes是名词，意为“衣服，服装”，是衣服的总称，包括上衣、内衣、裤子等，它只有用复数形式，单数形式cloth意思是“布，布匹”，所以不能用this，that来修饰；但可以用the, some, many, a lot of, these, those等词修饰。clothes作句子的主语时，谓语动词要用复数形式，例如：
These clothes are red.这些衣服是红色的。
Her clothes are very good.她的衣服都很好。
还有一个单词clothing也是名词，意为“衣服，衣物”，也是衣着的总称，是集体名词，只有单数形式，没有复数形式。可以说children’s clothing童装，winter clothing冬装，但不能说a suit of clothing一套衣服。
sale是名词，意为“出售；贱卖”，常与介词on和for搭配。
on sale表示“出售、上市（尤其指商店里的货物）”。例如：
The picture is not on sale in the shop.商店里不卖这张画。
Summer clothes are on sale now.夏季服装现在减价出售。
另外，for sale表示“待售”之意。例如：
The apples in the room are for sale.
房间里的这些苹果是要卖的。
15. For boys, you can buy socks for only ￥5 each! 对于男孩子，你可以给他买只有5元钱一双的袜子。
问：each和every都可以翻译成“一个，每一”，它们有区别吗？
答：each和every都有表示“每一个”的意思。each强调个体（各自），指两者或两者以上的每一个；every强调人或事的总体（每一个都），指三者以上的每一个。例如：
There are many trees on each side of the river.河的两边有很多树。
I get up early every morning.我每天早起。
【模拟试题】（答题时间：90分钟）
I. 将下列短语译成英语
1. 看一看____________
2. 服装店____________
3. 出售____________
4. 亲自____________
5. 以合理的价格____________
6. 给你____________
II. 按要求写出单词
1. sell（名词）____________ 2. sell（反义词）____________
3. cheap（反义词）____________ 4. long（反义词）____________
5. white（反义词）____________ 6. tomato（复数）____________
7. box（复数）____________ 8. like（第三人称单数）____________
9. bring（反义词）____________ 10. easy（反义词）____________
III. 选择填空
1. This ____________ is small. Do you have a big one
A. shirts B. short C. pant D. shirt
2. That coat is ____________.
A. 100 dollar B. 100 dollars C. 100 $ D. 100 yuans
3. How much ____________ these carrots
A. are B. is C. do D. does
4. These shirts ____________ only 5 dollars. Do you want ____________
A. are, it B. is, them C. are, them D. is, it
5. ---- How much ____________ the sweater
--- ____________ fifty yuan.
A. is, It’s B. are, They’re C. is, They’re D. are, It’s
6. This shirt ____________ 25 yuan.
A. is on sale for B. are on sale
C. are on sale for D. is sale
7. The price of the shorts is very ____________.
A. dear B. cheap C. expensive D. high
8. Huaxing’s fantastic sale! You name it, we have it, ____________ a very good price.
A. in B. at C. on D. of
9. We have bags ____________ all colors.
A. in B. at C. on D. for
10. Twenty-eight and twelve ____________.
A. are fourty B. is forty
C. is fourty D. are forty
11. --- Where ____________ your new pants
--- ____________ on the bed.
A. is, It’s B. are, They’re
C. is, They’re D. are, It’s
12. --- ____________ are the socks
--- ____________ black.
A. What color, It’s B. What size, It’s
C. What color, They’re D. What size, They’re
13. --- What is the ____________ of your sweater
--- It’s $ 50.
A. color B. size C. price D. style
14. We have socks ____________ all colors ____________ just ￥2 each.
A. in, in B. in, for C. for, in D. for, at
e down ____________ Mr Cool’s Clothing Store ____________ yourself.
A. to, for B. for, to C. /, for D. for, by
16. There are many things ____________.
A. sale B. sell C. on sale D. for sell
17. --- ____________ shoes do you want
---- The green ____________.
A. What, one B. What, ones
C. Which, one D. Which, ones
18. Can you ____________ your book ____________ me
A. lend, to B. borrow, from
C. lend, from D. borrow, to
19. We read $ 20 as ____________.
A. twenty dollar B. twenty dollars
C. dollar twenty D. dollars twenty
IV. 看图回答问题
1.
Q: Can I help you
A: Yes, please. ________________________.
2.
Q: What color do you like
A: ______________________ .
3.
Q: Which hat do you like
A: _______________________.
4.
Q: How much are the socks
A: ________________________.
5.
Q: How much is the green bag
A: __________________________.
V. 根据情景选择句子补全对话，有两项是多余的
A: 1
B: Yes, please. I want a skirt for my daughter.
A: 2
B: Green or blue.
A: Look at the skirts over there. We have different colors. Which would you like
B: I think the green one is nice. 3
A: It’s 150 yuan.
B: Oh, It’s too expensive.
A: 4 It’s only 60 yuan.
B: It’s cheap, but it is big. 5
A: Yes. Here you are.
a. Can you help me b. What colour would you like
c. Can I help you d. Do you have a small one
e. How much are they f. What about this one
g. What’s the price
1. _________ 2. _________ 3. _________
4. _________ 5. _________
VI. 连词成句（注意标点符号及字母的大、小写）
1. a, sell, goods, we, price, these, good, at, very
________________________________________________________.
2. green, they, in, coats, have
________________________________________________________.
3. do, you, to, what, want, buy
________________________________________________________
4. hat, his, have, sister, does, red, a
________________________________________________________
5. sells, store, which, vegetables
________________________________________________________
VII. 按要求改写下列各句，每空一词。
1. That bag is black.（改为同义词）
That _________ a _________ bag.
2. This is a T-shirt.（改为复数句子）
_________ are _________.
3. I like Chinese. （改为否定句）
I _________ _________ Chinese.
4. The boy under the tree is Li Lei.（对画线部分提问）
_________ _________ is Li Lei
5. What’s the price of the dictionary （改为同义句）
_________ _________ is the dictionary
VIII. 完形填空
A
A: Excuse me, Robert. May I 1 your ruler, please
B: Yes, of course....Oh, 2 my ruler I can’t 3 it.
A: Is it in your desk
B: Let me 4 . No, it isn’t.
A: Is it in your schoolbag
B: No, it’s not in the bag. Ah, I see it! It’s under the desk 5 the floor! Here you are.
A: Thanks. But this one is 6 . Do you have a long one
B: Sorry. I only have this one.
A: Well, 7 I get a long one I need one now.
B: You can buy a long one in the shop.
A: 8 shop
B: The one near our school.
A: 9 you think it’s still open now
B: What’s the time by your watch
A: It’s about five fifty.
B: I think it’s still open. It opens at 8:30 a.m. and closes at 6:30 p.m.
A: OK. Let’s 10 .
（ ）1. A. borrow B lend C. take D. give
（ ）2. A. Where B. Where’s C. What D. What’s
（ ）3. A. look B. look at C. find D. watch
（ ）4. A. look B. look at C. find D. have a look
（ ）5. A. in B. under C. on D. next to
（ ）6. A. too short B. very big C. very small D. too long
（ ）7. A. where B. where’s C. where can D. where does
（ ）8. A. Where B. What C. Which D. Whose
（ ）9. A. Are B. Do C. Does D. Is
（ ）10. A. go and see B. to go and see
C. to go and to see D. go and to see
B
Come to Black’s Clothing Sale for kids. Girls! 1 socks are only $ 4, The shorts 2 only $ 5. 3 hat is only $ 5. 4 you like this sweater It 5 only $ 5. 6 boys, red, green and blue T-shirt are only $ 10.
根据短文内容，选择正确答案。
（ ）1. A. This B. That C. It D. These
（ ）2. A. is B. am C. are D. be
（ ）3. A. This B. There C. It D. Those
（ ）4. A. Is B. Are C. Does D. Do
（ ）5. A. is B. am C. are D. be
（ ）6. A. In B. To C. For D. on
IX. 阅读理解。
A
George is a young man. He has a very big dog and a very small car. He likes playing volleyball. One day, after he plays volleyball for an hour at his club, he runs out and jumps into a car. His dog comes after him, but it doesn’t jump into the same car, it jumps into the next one.
“Come here, silly dog!”George cries at it, but the dog still stays in the other car.
George puts his key into the lock of the car, but the key doesn’t turn. Then he looks at the car again. It’s not his! He is in a wrong car. But the dog is in the right one.
1. George likes ______________ .
A. playing basketball B. playing volleyball
C. playing with his dog D. driving his car
2. George __________, so he jumps into a wrong car.
A. is careful（细心的） B. plays volleyball
C. is careless D. runs out
3. The dog __________ .
A. doesn’t like George B. cries at George
C. doesn’t jump into a car D. is clever
4. Why doesn’t George open the door Because ___________ .
A. it isn’t his car
B. something is wrong with the door
C. something is wrong with the key
D. George is silly（愚蠢）
5. Which of the following is the best title（题目）
_______________.
A. George
B. George and his dog
C. George and his car
D. George likes playing
B
A mother and her young son get on a bus in a small city and sit down. The bus conductor comes to them for their money. The mother says, “I want a ticket to Oxford.”And gives her a shilling.
The conductor looks at the small boy and says to him, “How old are you, young man ”The mother begins speaking, but the conductor stops her and the boy says, “I’m four years old at home, and two and a half on buses.”
The mother takes six penny out of her bag and gives to the conductor. The conductor gives her one and a half tickets.
1. Where are the mother and her son now
__________________________________________________________________
2. Where do they want to go
__________________________________________________________________
3. How much is a ticket
__________________________________________________________________
4. How old is the small boy
__________________________________________________________________
5. How much does the mother pay altogether
__________________________________________________________________
X. 书面表达（5分）
根据你去商店购买学习用品的情景编写一则对话。
__________________________________________________________________
【试题答案】
I. 1. have a look 2. clothes store 3. on sale
4. for yourself 5. at a very good price 6. Here you are
II. 1. sale 2. buy 3. dear / expensive 4. short
5. black 6. tomatoes 7. boxes 8. likes
9. take 10. hard/ difficult
III. 1～5 DBACA 6～10 ADBAB
11～15 BCCBA 16～19 CDAB
IV. 1. I want a blue sweater.
2. I like the white one.
3. I like the black hat.
4. They’re six dollars and fifty cents.
5. It’s 18 dollars.
V. 1. c 2. b 3. g 4. f 5. d
VI. 1. We sell these goods at a very good price.
2. They have coats in green.
3. What do you want to buy
4. Does his sister have a red hat
5. Which store sells vegetables
VII. 1. is, black 2. These, T-shirts 3. don’t like
4. which boy 5. How much
VIII. A.
1～5 ABCDC 6～10 ACCBA
B. DCADAC
IX. A. BCDAB
B. 1. They are on the bus
2. They want to go to Oxford
3. A ticket is a shilling.
4. The small boy is four years old.
5. the mo
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 1 页 共 17 页百校名师经典导学 中心全程同步培优
Review of Unit 1~3
进入初中生活已经一个多月了，同学们已经适应初中的学习了吗？养成了一些良好的学习习惯了吗？及时的复习、巩固就是我们必须要掌握的好习惯之一，它会使所学的零零散散的知识系统起来，因此会非常扎实，不易忘记。今天就让我们一起复习一下前三个单元。
（一）语言目标（Language Goals）
1. Introduce yourself & Greet people 介绍自己，与别人打招呼
2. Identify ownership. 辨认物品的归谁所有。
3. Introduce people & Identify people介绍人和识别人
4. Ask for and give telephone numbers 询问和给出电话号码
（二）语言结构（Language Structure）
1. Present tense to be
2. Possessive adjectives my, your, his, her
3. 指示代词this、that
4. 一般疑问句及其简略回答
5. What questions and How questions
（三）主要句型（Target Language）
1. What’s your / his / her name
2. My /Her name is Lucy Smith.
3. Nice to meet you!
4. What’s your telephone number
5. My telephone number is 5634-6907.
6. Is this your pencil Yes, it is. / No, it isn’t.
7. Is that his book Yes, it is. / No, it isn’t.
8. What’s this in English It’s an eraser.
9. How do you spell pencil
10. This is my brother.
11. These are my friends.
12. He’s my brother.
13. Those are my brothers.
14. －Is that your sister
－No, she isn’t.
15. Thanks for the photo of your family.
（四）疑难解析（Key Points）
1. 物主代词
（1）表示所有关系的代词叫物主代词，分为名词性和形容词性两种。现阶段常用的是形容词性物主代词，它们一般放在所修饰名词的前面，同时它们也有人称和数的变化。
（2）形容词性物主代词的用法。
形容词性的物主代词见下表：
形容词性物主代词 my your his her its our your their
中文 我的 你的 他的 她的 它的 我们的 你们的 他/她/它们的
注意：
A. 形容词性物主代词起形容词作用，在句中只能作定语，也就是说它后面必须跟一个名词。即：形容词性物主代词＋名词
如：如my backpack我的书包；my new backpack我的新书包
I don’t know her name. 我不知道她的名字。
B. 形容词性物主代词的前后是不出现冠词的，这是在书写句子时最容易犯的错误。如：my father, his desk, our room, their names, your aunt等。
C. 物主代词有人称、数和性的变化，即第一、二、三人称；单数和复数；他、她、它。
D. it’s与its的区别
it’s与its是两个极易出错的词。it’s＝it is，是it is的缩写，其中it是人称代词；its的意思是“它的”，物主代词。如：
－What’s that 那是什么？
－It’s a mouse. Its name is Mickey. 它是一只老鼠，它的名字叫米奇。
2. 人称代词
英语中有一类代替具体人名的词叫人称代词。它有一、二、三人称与单数、复数及性别之分（以后我们会了解到人称代词还有主格与宾格之分，在这里不做解释）
人称代词列表如下：
人称代词 I we you he she it they
的主格 我 我们 你、你们 他 她 它 他们
（1）Who’s Mike 麦克是谁？
He’s my friend. 他是我的朋友。
注：he代替上文中的Mike，而不能再用Mike来重复回答：Mike is my friend.
（2）Li Lei is a girl. She’s twelve. 李蕾是个女孩，她十二岁。
注：she代替前句中的Li Lei。
（3）Look at that bird. It is Polly. 看那只鸟，它是波利。
注：it代替前句中的that bird。
（4）Who’s it （门外有敲门声）谁呀？
It’s me. 是我。
3. be的用法
系动词be在一般现在时中有am, is, are 三种表现形式。它们的汉语意思均为“是”。在英语表达中起着重要的作用。现就其基本用法归纳如下：
（1）am, is, are这三个动词常用作连系动词，用来表示人或事物的性质、状态等，在句中起连接主语和表语的作用，相当于主语和表语之间的一座桥梁。如：
This is my mother. 这是我妈妈。
You are a student.你是一名学生。
（2）am, is, are的基本意思是“是”，但应注意的是汉语有时不译出“是”，翻译成英语句子时切不可遗漏“是”（am, is, are），否则就会出现“无‘是’生非”的现象，如
What’s your name 你叫什么？
My name is Zhang Ce. 我叫张策。
（3）记住它们与主语的搭配。
I＋am
they / you +are
it / she / he +is
I am here. 我在这里。
This is my bag. 这是我的书包。
His name is Bob. 他的名字叫鲍勃。
Tom is a good boy. 汤姆是个好男孩。
You are my good friend. 你是我的好朋友。
注意：I am 可缩写为I’m；
His name is 可缩写为His name’s；
You are可缩写为You’re；
What is 可缩写为What’s。
4. 人称代词与be动词的搭配
人称 完全形式 缩写形式 汉语意思
第一人称 I（单） I am = I’m 我是
we（复） we are = we’re 我们是
第二人称 you you are = you’re 你（你们）是
he he is = he’s 他是
第三 she she is = she’s 她是
人称 it it is= it’s 它是
they they are = they’re 他们是
上面这些不同人称代词与不同的系动词搭配，这是汉语中不存在的现象，因此，我们需要特别记忆才能确保用的时候不会犯错。
5. 指示代词 this, that, these, those
（1）this一般用来指时间或空间上较近的人或物，意为“这”“这个”；that常用来指时间或空间上较远的人或物,意为“那”“那个”；this和that都是指示代词；it是人称代词，意为“它”。it则没有远近之分。试比较：
This is a pen. 这是一枝钢笔。（近指）
That is a book. 那是一本书。（远指）
It is a ruler. 它是一把尺子。
（2）these这些，是this的复数，是指时间和空间离说话人较近的人或物；those那些，是that的复数，指时间或空间上离说话人较远的人或物，通常构成以下句型：
These / Those are my / his / her bags.
这些/那些是我的/他的/她的书包。
What are these / those 这些/那些是什么？
They are books（They’re books）. 是书。
Are these / those maps 这/那些是地图吗？Yes, they are. 是的。
No, they aren’t. 不是的。
（3）在Unit 2中，我们学习了指示代词this / that，用来指代物品，放在一起的两样东西，先说this，后说that。如：
This is a pen. That is a pencil.
这是一支钢笔，那是一支铅笔。
（4）在Unit 3中，我们学习指示代词指代人。当向别人介绍某人时，常用句型。
This is … That is …用于介绍单个的人
介绍某人时可以用this，也可以用that，一般不用it。如：
This is Tom. That is Li Wei.
These are … Those are … 用于介绍两个或两个以上的人。如：
These are my grandparents.
向别人面对面介绍某人时说This is …，不说That is…。如：
This is Helen. Helen, this is Tom. 这是海伦。海伦，这是汤姆。
（5）This is不能缩写，而That is 可以缩写。如：
This is a bike. That’s a car.
这是一辆自行车，那是一辆轿车。
（6）在回答this或that作主语的疑问句时，要用it代替this或that。如：
—Is this a notebook 这是笔记本吗？
—Yes, it is. 是的，它的。
—What’s that 那是什么？
—It’s a kite. 是只风筝。
（7）it可以指天气、时间、距离或人，也常用来代替前文中所提到的东西。如：
It’s a fine day today. 今天是个好天。
What’s the time It’s six. 几点了？六点。
It’s not far from here. 离这儿不远。
—Who is it 谁呀？
—It’s me. 是我。
This is a pen. It’s Lily’s.
这是一枝钢笔。它是莉莉的。
6. 英语中的疑问句
表达疑问的句子称为疑问句。疑问句分为两种，特殊疑问句和一般疑问句。
（1）句首出现疑问词what, where, how, how old, who等等的问句属于特殊疑问句。这种问句可以直接作答。例如：
What is this It is a cake.
这是什么？这是蛋糕。
Where is our teacher He is in the classroom.
我们的老师在哪儿？他在教室里。
Who is the girl She is Han Meimei.
这女孩是谁？她就是韩梅梅。
How old are you I am twelve.
你多大年龄？我十二岁。
（2）以be（am / is / are）系动词，can 情态动词，或do / does助动词开头的问句属于一般疑问句，其应答常用Yes表示肯定，No表示否定。例如：
Is this a bike Yes, it is.
这是一辆自行车吗？是的。
Are you English No, I’m not.
你是英国人吗？不是。
Am I right Yes, you are.
我是正确的吗？是的。
Can you spell it Sorry, I can’t.
你能拼读它吗？对不起，我不能。
Do you know the new student Yes, I do.
你认识新来的这位同学吗？我认识。
7. 名词复数
名词又分为可数名词和不可数名词。
可数名词：
（1）定义：是可以计数的名词。
（2）可数名词前可以用a,an限定。
（3）可数名词前可以用one, two, three…限定。
（4）可数名词有复数形式。
不可数名词：
（1）定义：指不能计数的名词。
（2）不可数名词前不可以用a, an限定。
（3）不可数名词前不可以用one, two, three…限定。
（4）不可数名词没有复数形式。
可数名词有单、复数之分，表示一个人或事物的名词用单数，表示两个或两个以上人或事物的名词用复数，其构成方法、读音及例词语音列表如下：
（1）规则变化
情况 构成方法 读音 例词
一般情况 加-s 清辅音后读［s］浊辅音和元音后读［z］ map-maps[mps]cat-cats[kts]car-cars［ka:z］boy-boys［biz］tree-trees［tri:z］
以s, sh, ch,x结尾的词 加-es 读［iz］ bus-buses［］watch-watches[]box-boxes[]
以ce, se, ze, ge等结尾的词 加-s 读［iz］ licence-licences（执照）［］orange-oranges［iz］blouse-blouses[]
以辅音＋y结尾的词 变y为i再加-es 读［z］ baby-babies[]family-families[miliz]
以f 或fe结尾的名词 变f,fe为v, 再加es 读[vz] life- livesleaf- leaves 但 roof- roofs 除外
（2）不规则变化
A. 改变单数名词中的元音字母。例如：
man--- men woman--- women foot--- feet goose--- geese
B. 单复数形式相同。例如：
a sheep--- ten sheep a deer --- six deer
C. 形式有所改变。例如：
a child --- many children an ox --- two oxen a mouse --- five mice
D. 表示“某国人”的名词单、复数形式因习惯而不同。记住下面的口诀，会对你有所帮助。“英法联盟a变e，中日友好是一致，其余一律加s” 例如：
an Englishman --- seven Englishmen a Frenchwoman--- two Frenchwomen
a Chinese--- three Chinese a Japanese--- four Japanese
a German --- five Germans an American --- seven Americans
写出下列名词的复数形式。
knife_________ woman_________
people_________ radio_________
potato_________ sheep_________
box_________ watch_________
apple_________ baby_________
［答案］knives, women, people, radios, potatoes, sheep, boxes, watches, apples, babies.
【模拟试题】（答题时间：120分钟）
一、用括号中所给单词的适当形式填空
1. This is Tony’s friend. _____（He） name is Jim
2. What’s _____（you） sister’s name
3. I have a pet dog. ______（It） name is Dingding.
4. Please call ______ （I）, Mrs. White.
5. Lily and Lucy are twins. _____（They） father is a doctor.
6. Here’re two ___________（set） of keys.
7. ________（she） ID card is lost.
8. Are those his __________（watch）
9. Please ____________ （call） me at seven.
10. The two English ____________ （dictionary） are very good.
二、单选
（ ）1. ---Is ___ Chinese car ---No，____ isn’t.
A. that, this B. this, it C. it, this D. that, that
（ ） 2. Is that ____
A. his a pen B. pen C. a his pen D. his pen
（ ） 3. ---____ do you spell watch --- W-A-T-C-H.
A. How B. Who C. What D. Can
（ ） 4. ---Are you Mr. Smith ---____.
A. Yes, I’m B. Yes, I am C. No, I am D. No, you aren’t
（ ） 5. Welcome to ____ school.
A. you B. we C. they D. our
（ ） 6. ____ your friend Kate Brown
A. Do B. Are C. Am D. Is
（ ） 7. Tom and I ____ good friends. He ____ twelve.
A. am, is B. is, are C. are, are D. are, is
（ ） 8. There is ___ “f” in this word.
A. a B. an C. the D. /
（ ） 9. Please call me ____ 123-456.
A. to B. at C. in D. for
（ ）10. What is this ____ English
A. in B. at C. to D of
（ ）11. ---Is that an _________ jeep ---Yes, it is.
A. my B. old C. your
（ ） 12. Hello, Jim. _________my sister Sue.
A. This is B. He is C. His name is
（ ） 13. ---Is Mrs. Zhao a Japanese woman ---_________.
A. Yes, Mrs. Zhao is B. Yes, he is C. No, she isn’t
（ ）14. ---Hello, Mike, is this _________ bird ---Yes, it is.
A. him B. your C. me
（ ） 15. Mike and Tom _________ good _________.
A. are, friend B. are, brothers C. is, students
（ ） 16. The picture is very nice. Let me have a look _________ it.
A. at B. on C. to
（ ）17. ---Your coat is very nice. --- ____.
A. Not nice B. Thank you C. You’re welcome D. OK
（ ）18. ---____. Is this your pencil
A. Hello B. Hi C. Sorry D. Excuse me
（ ）19. ---My name is Mary Brown.
---What’s your ____ name
---Brown.
A. full B. first C. nick D. family
（ ）20. The man’s name is Peter Mark. We can call him ____.
A. Mr. Peter B. Mr. Mark C. Sir Mark D. Mark
（ ）21. Joan and Kate are in _____.
A. class 3，grade 1 B. Grade 1，Class 3
C. Class 3 Grade 1 D. Class 3，Grade 1
（ ） 22. --- _______
- -- His name is Mike.
A. How are you B. What’s his name
C. How old is he D. Where is he
（ ） 23. His name is Alan Robert Smith. His family name is ______.
A. Alan B. Robert C. Alan Robert D. Smith
（ ）24. --- Excuse me, are you Tina
--- _______
A. Yes, I’m not. B. No, I am
C. Yes, I am. D. I’m not.
（ ）25. _____ name is Tony. _____ am twelve.
A. I, My B. I, I C. My, I D. My, My
三、阅读理解
A
A: Who’s that boy
B: That is my brother. He is Sam. Hello! Sam. This is Sue. She is my good friend. We’re in the same class. This is Sam. He is my brother.
A: Good morning，Sam.
B: Good morning，Sue. Nice to meet you. How do you do
A: How do you do Oh，you look the same （看起来一模一样）. Are you twins
B: Yes，you’re right. This way，please.
A: OK.
B: Let’s go.
（ ）1. Who’s that boy
A. Sam. B. Sue. C. “I”.
（ ）2. Who are good friends
A. Sue and I. B. Sam and I. C. Sam and Sue.
（ ）3. Who are twins
A. Sue and Sam. B. Sam and I. C. Sue and I.
（ ）4. _____ are in the same class.
A. Sue and I B. Sue and Sam C. Sam and I
B
A mother and her young son get into a bus. The bus conductor （售票员） comes to them for their money. The mother says，“I want a ticket （票） to Shanghai”，and gives her 5yuan. The conductor looks at the boy，and says to him，“ How old are you，young man ”The mother begins to say，but the conductor stops her and the boy says，“I’m 4 at home，and 2 in buses.”The mother has to give 2.5yuan to the conductor.
（ ）1. At first the mother doesn’t give ____ money for the tickets.
A. some B. any C. enough （足够的）
（ ）2. At last the mother gives ____ to the conductor for her son’s ticket.
A. 7yuan B. 7.5yuan C. 2.5yuan
（ ）3. The mother gives the conductor ____ in all （总共）.
A. 10yuan B. 7.5yuan C. 5yuan
（ ）4. The boy is ____ in fact （事实上）.
A. 2 B. 4 C. 7
（ ）5. The mother is ____ .
A. not honest （诚实） B. honest C. very clever
C
阅读下面的“失物”与“招领”广告，并回答有关问题
Lost Found
My school ID Card Red Hat
The card number is 426658. Is this your hat
My name is Mike. Please call Rich Wood at
Please call 685-6034. 235-0285.
1. Is that Mike’s ID card ____________________________________
2. Is that Rich’s hat ____________________________________
3. What’s the card number ____________________________________
4. What’s Rich’s family name ___________________________________
5. What color is the hat ___________________________________
D
Mark Green is my good friend. He is English. He has a yellow bike. His bike number is 9075. His mother has a green jeep. The number is JA3566. His father has a green jeep, too. The number is JA3567.
（ ） 1. Green is Mark’s ______.
A. color B. first name C. brother D. family name
（ ） 2. Mark has a _________.
A. yellow bike B. yellow jeep C. green bike D. green jeep
（ ） 3. Mr Green’s jeep number is ________.
A. 9075 B. 9076 C. JA3566 D. JA3567
（ ） 4. His mother’s jeep is _______.
A. yellow B. green C. red D. white
（ ） 5. Mark and _______ are good friends.
A. I B. me C. you D. she
四、完形填空
_ 1 _ name is Jim Green. _2 _ am twelve. This is _ 3 _ school. _ 4 _ is No.2 Middle School. My _ 5 _ name is Miss Gao. _6 _ school I have a friend. _ 7 _ name is Sun Hui. _ 8 _ is a Chinese boy. _ 9 _ are in the same class. We are good _ 10 _.
（ ） 1. A. Me B. My C. I D. Mine
（ ） 2. A. Me B. My C. I D. Mine
（ ） 3. A. I B. mine C. me D. my
（ ） 4. A. It B. This C. That D. School
（ ） 5. A. teacher B. teacher’s C. her D. his
（ ） 6. A. In B. On C. At D. Of
（ ） 7. A. Her B. He C. Him D. His
（ ） 8. A. Her B. He C. Him D. His
（ ） 9. A. We B. You C. Our D. They
（ ）10. A. boy B. girl C. friends D. girls
五、用be的适当形式填空 Complete with “am/ is / are”
1. --- What ___________ it in English
--- It _______ a book.
2. ---Who __________ that man
--- He’s Tom’s father.
3. Ann’s Chinese name _________ Lili.
4. ---What color ________ her pen
--- It’s yellow.
5. I ______ an American. And she ___________ a Chinese.
6. ---What _______the Chinese for desk
--- Sorry, I don’t know.
7. I _________ in Class One and my sister _________ in Class Ten.
8. Jason and Brad ________ brothers.
9. Annie Davis ________ a teacher.
10. This _______ Mike Cohen.
11. I ______ a student.
12. __________ you classmates
六、连词成句（注意大小写和标点）
1. I, Jim, friends, are, good, and
_______________________________________.
2. your, is ,cat, this, Lucy
______________________________________
3. the, your, photo, thanks, for, of, family
_____________________________________.
4. them, love, much, very, I
_____________________________________.
5. this, brother, is, Tony, my
____________________________________.
6. your, is, ring, this
_____________________________________
7. 635-4024, Rick’s, number, is, telephone
______________________________________.
8. English, in, what, this, is
______________________________________
9. please, can, spell, you, it
_____________________________________
七. 书面表达
（一）根据图表写出下列任务关系。
1. Ann/ Tom
________________________________________________________________________
2. Tom and Ann/Lucy
________________________________________________________________________
3. Sarah/ Lucy
________________________________________________________________________
4. Sally/ Sarah
________________________________________________________________________
5. Peter/ Lucy
________________________________________________________________________
6. Lucy / David
________________________________________________________________________
（二）阅读下列问题，根据你的实际情况，用完整的句子回答。
① Do you have a big family or a small family
________________________________________________________________________
② What’re your grandparents’ names
________________________________________________________________________
③ What are your parents’ names
________________________________________________________________________
④ How old are they
________________________________________________________________________
⑤ Is your father a doctor
________________________________________________________________________
⑥ Is your mother a policewoman
________________________________________________________________________
⑦ Are your family all in China
________________________________________________________________________
⑧ Do you love your parents
________________________________________________________________________
【试题答案】
一、1. His 2. your 3. Its 4. me 5. Their
6. sets 7. Her 8. watches 9. call 10. dictionaries
二、1.B 2.D 3.A 4.B 5.D 6.D 7.D 8.B 9.B 10.A 11.B 12.A 13.C 14.B 15.B
16.A 17.B 18.D 19.D 20. B 21.D 22.B 23.D 24.C 25.C
三、A. 1.A 2.A 3.B 4.A
B. 1.C 2.C 3. B 4. B 5.A
C. 1. Yes, it is. 2. No, it isn’t. 3. The card number is 426658.
4. Rich’s family name is Wood. 5. It’s red.
D. 1.D 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. A
四、1.B 2.C 3.D 4.A 5.B 6.C 7.D 8.B 9.A 10.C
五、1. is, is 2. is 3. is 4. is 5. am, is 6. is 7. am, is
8. are 9. is 10. is 11. am 12. Are
六、1. Jim and I are good friends.
2. Is this your cat, Lucy
3. Thanks for the photo of your family.
4. I love them very much.
5. This is my brother Tony.
6. Is this your ring
7. Rick’s telephone number is 635-4024.
8. What is this in English
9. Can you spell it, please
七、（一）1. Ann is Tom’s wife.
2. Tom and Ann are Lucy’s parents.
3. Sarah is Lucy’s sister.
4. Sally is Sarah’s grandmother.
5. Peter is Lucy’s uncle.
6. Lucy is David’s granddaughter.
（二）根据自己情况做答，答案略。
课件中心精品资料 www. 版权所有@课件中心 第 2 页 共 11 页